JP2020116467A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a presentation effect.SOLUTION: A game machine can display a specific display corresponding to a variable display in a mode with movement and can change a display mode of the specific display. Further, the game machine can perform a change suggestion presentation in which a change in the display mode of the specific display is suggested. According to a movement mode of the specific display when the change suggestion presentation is performed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed at a different rate. According to the movement mode of the specific display, the change suggestion presentation can be performed at a different rate.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 76

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and a game medium wins a prize area such as a winning opening provided in the game area and an execution condition (starting condition) is established, Pachinko that enhances amusement with a so-called variable display game that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter, display symbols) on a variable display device and determines whether to give a predetermined game value based on the display result. There is a game machine. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbols in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, the player is in an advantageous state (big hit game state). For example, a pachinko gaming machine that has been in the jackpot game state has a special electric winning device called a special winning opening or attacker in an open state, which makes it extremely easy to win a game ball and gives the player a predetermined game value. Provide continuously for a certain period of time. In such a pachinko gaming machine, various types of effects that make the player expect the display result to be a specific display mode are executed before the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device.

As such a gaming machine, there is one capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to a variable display (for example, a hold display corresponding to a variable display that has not been executed yet, an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed). In some cases, the hold display is always displayed in a rotating manner (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2013-212136, A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is not possible to enhance the effect because only the specific display operates.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing a staging effect.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of variable display,
Corresponding to variable display in a mode that involves movement (for example, a mode in which the display position is switched to the advance position or the retreat position, a mode in which the expressionless expression mode is switched to a display mode in which the eyes are opened to sweat and tears are displayed) It is possible to display a specific display (for example, an active display corresponding to a fluctuation being executed, a hold display corresponding to a fluctuation which has not been started yet), and a display mode of the specific display (for example, a display color (white, blue, red The shape, pattern, position, range, and the like to be displayed may be changed to a specific display unit (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, steps S90663B and S90667B are performed to display the active display. , A portion for changing the display mode of the specific display by performing the steps S903911 and S903929 to display the hold display and performing the step S904713).
A change suggestion effect executing means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100) capable of executing a change suggestion effect (for example, a change effect (first change effect, second change effect)) that suggests a change in the display mode of the specific display. In step S904506, a change effect is set, in step S908004, a process table corresponding to the change effect is selected, and by performing steps S908006 and S908105, a change effect is executed).
The specific display means is an operation mode of specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed (for example, display position (advance position, retract position). Operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward, rightward). Other operation modes such as ), etc.) can change the display mode of the specific display at different rates (for example, the production control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904709, When the display position of the specific display which is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100%, while the specific display which is the execution target of the first change effect is changed. When the display position is the retracted position, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%),
Change determining means for determining whether or not the display mode of the specific display has changed,
Further comprising an operation mode selection unit for selecting an operation mode of the specific display,
The specific display means displays the specific display in the operation mode selected by the operation mode selection means,
The operation mode selection means is
As the operation mode of the specific display, it is possible to select one of a first operation mode and a second operation mode in which the display position changes more frequently than the first operation mode,
When the change deciding unit decides to change the display mode, and the unchanged specific display whose display mode has not been changed is displayed, it is higher than the case where the unchanged specific display is not displayed. 2 Select the operation mode,
The change suggesting effect executing means is capable of executing the change suggesting effect at different rates depending on the operation mode of the specific display.
With such a configuration, the player can be focused on the operation mode of the specific display.

(1) Other gaming machines
A gaming machine that includes display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of performing variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the advantageous state is controlled by the aspect of the effect executed by a predetermined effect means, and to execute an effect auxiliary display related to the suggestion effect on the display means. A certain suggestive effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step S804 or step S805) is provided,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the effect auxiliary display at different positions depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied (for example, if YES is determined in step S803, the process in step S805 is executed). Etc.),
further,
Corresponding to variable display in a mode that involves movement (for example, a mode in which the display position is switched to the advance position or the retreat position, a mode in which the expressionless expression mode is switched to a display mode in which the eyes are opened to sweat and tears are displayed) It is possible to display a specific display (for example, an active display corresponding to a fluctuation being executed, a hold display corresponding to a fluctuation which has not been started yet), and a display mode of the specific display (for example, a display color (white, blue, red The shape, pattern, position, range, and the like to be displayed may be changed to a specific display unit (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, steps S90663B and S90667B are performed to display the active display. , A portion for changing the display mode of the specific display by performing the steps S903911 and S903929 to display the hold display and performing the step S904713).
A change suggestion effect executing means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100) capable of executing a change suggestion effect (for example, a change effect (first change effect, second change effect)) that suggests a change in the display mode of the specific display. In step S904506, a change effect is set, in step S908004, a process table corresponding to the change effect is selected, and by performing steps S908006 and S908105, a change effect is executed).
The specific display means is an operation mode of specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed (for example, display position (advance position, retract position). Operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward, rightward). Other operation modes such as ), etc.) can change the display mode of the specific display at different rates (for example, the production control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904709, When the display position of the specific display which is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100%, while the specific display which is the execution target of the first change effect is changed. When the display position is the retracted position, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%),
Change determining means for determining whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes,
Further comprising an operation mode selection unit for selecting an operation mode of the specific display,
The specific display means displays the specific display in the operation mode selected by the operation mode selection means,
The operation mode selection means is
As the operation mode of the specific display, it is possible to select one of a first operation mode and a second operation mode in which the display position is changed more frequently than the first operation mode,
When the change determining means determines to change the display mode and the unchanged specific display whose display mode has not been changed is displayed, the change determination means displays a higher ratio than when the unchanged specific display is not displayed. It is characterized in that two operation modes are selected.
According to such a configuration, the execution pattern of the effect auxiliary display is diversified, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Moreover, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
When the specific condition is satisfied, the suggestive effect execution means can execute the effect auxiliary display in a specific display area of the display means (for example, movement of a movable body in the specific display area of the image display device 5). It is possible to display the effect image and execute the movable body effect in a different mode from the normal time),
You may do it.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the specific condition is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Variable display means for performing variable display,
Correspondence display means for performing correspondence display corresponding to variable display (for example, effect control CPU 120 for performing hold display or active display),
Corresponding display changing means capable of changing the display mode of the corresponding display and enlarging the display area of the corresponding display (for example, when the enlargement mode setting for performing the enlarged display is performed in the process of step S807). , A production control CPU 120 for performing enlargement control for enlarging and displaying all the pending displays and active displays including the pending display of the notice target), and the like.
You may do it.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the correspondence display changes, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above,
The predetermined effect means is a movable body (for example, a movable body 99) operable according to the effect executed by the display means,
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of operating the movable body and executing an auxiliary effect display related to the operation of the movable body (for example, displaying an effect image), and when the specific condition is satisfied, Unlike the case where the specific condition is not satisfied, the effect auxiliary display is executed in the specific display area (for example, as the movable body special effect, the movable body 99 is rotated and the effect is displayed on the small screen which is the specific display area. Display images, etc.),
You may do it.

According to such a configuration, the production assistance display can be properly performed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (4) above,
Variable display means for performing variable display,
Correspondence display means for performing correspondence display corresponding to variable display (for example, effect control CPU 120 for performing hold display or active display),
A display control unit that controls the display of the specific display region (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S807 and S810).
The display control means can display a display other than the corresponding display in the specific display area (for example, a display other than a display related to a hold/active change effect such as a hold display, an active display, a character image in an action effect, etc.) ),
You may do it.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort caused by the corresponding display being displayed in the plurality of display areas.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (5) above,
Further, a notice effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of notice effects (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S814) is provided.
The notice effect executing means can execute the plurality of types of notice effects in the specific display area (the effect performed in step S814 is the case where a small screen as the specific display area is displayed). Small screen)
You may do it.

With such a configuration, the visibility of the notice production can be improved, the production effect can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (2) to (6) above,
The suggestion effect execution means can further execute a suggestion display effect different from the suggestion effect (for example, can execute a hold/active change effect),
The specific condition is satisfied when the suggestive effect and the suggestive display effect are executed within the same period (for example, by performing both the hold/active change effect and the movable object effect that perform enlarged display. Conditions are met),
The suggestion effect execution means ends at least the suggestion display effect after the end of the suggestion effect, and ends the display by the specific display area based on the completion of the suggestion effect (for example, hold/active change). The effect ends after the movable object effect ends, and the small screen as the specific display area is erased after the hold/active change effect ends),
You may do it.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect. Further, it is possible to reduce (prevent) a feeling of strangeness caused by ending the suggestive effect effect when the effect effect is halfway.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
Variable display means for performing variable display,
Correspondence display means for performing correspondence display corresponding to variable display (for example, effect control CPU 120 for performing hold display or active display),
Correspondence display changing means for changing the display mode of the correspondence display and displaying the correspondence display of the change target in a special display mode that is displayed only when the display mode of the correspondence display changes (for example, a notice) In order to be able to recognize which of the target variable displays is on hold, the CPU 120 for effect control for changing the display mode of the hold display of the notice target), and the like.
You may do it.

According to such a configuration, the target to be changed becomes clear, and the effect of production can be improved.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Variable display means for performing variable display,
Correspondence display means for performing correspondence display corresponding to variable display (for example, effect control CPU 120 for performing hold display or active display),
As shown in correspondence display changing means (FIGS. 26A, 26B, and 26C) for changing the display mode of the correspondence display by operating the action display (for example, a ball), the character 930 holds the color ball 931. When the ball is thrown toward the display TH, the color ball 931 collides with the hold display TH and the color of the hold display TH changes, and the like.
The correspondence display changing means,
A first pattern (such as a success pattern in FIGS. 26A, 26B, and 26C) that starts the display of the action display and changes the display mode of the correspondence display after a lapse of a predetermined period, and the display of the action display And a second pattern (such as a failure pattern in FIGS. 26A, 26B, and 26D) that does not change the display mode of the corresponding display after a predetermined period has elapsed,
After the display of the action display is started, it is possible to execute deceleration control for decelerating the speed of the action display with respect to the target corresponding display at a common timing in a predetermined period of the first pattern and the second pattern. There is (for example, as shown in FIG. 26(b), the speed of the ball starts decelerating at the same timing between success and failure),
You may do it.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the action display.

Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described below include the inventions according to the following (10) to (16). 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine, a specific display corresponding to a variable display as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-212136 (for example, a hold display corresponding to a variable display not yet executed, a variable display in execution) It is known that, for example, a hold display is always displayed in a rotating manner. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the effect cannot be enhanced because the specific display only operates. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of production.

(10) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and an aspect involving operation (for example, an aspect in which the display position is switched to an advance position or a retract position, A specific display corresponding to a variable display (for example, an active display corresponding to a change in execution, a still display has started) The display mode of the specific display (for example, display color (white, blue, red). It may be the shape, pattern, position, range, etc. to be displayed.) Can be changed to a specific display unit (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, steps S90663B and S90667B are performed to display the active display, steps S903911 and S903929 are performed to display the hold display, and step S904713 is performed. Change part that changes the display mode of the specific display) and a change suggestion effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the specific display (for example, change effect (first change effect, second change effect)) Effect execution means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, change effect is set in step S904506, a process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S908004, and change effect is executed by performing steps S90806 and S908105. The specific display means includes an operation mode (eg, display position (advance position, retract position). Operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) and display direction when the change suggestion effect is executed. The display mode of the specific display can be changed at different ratios (for example, other operation modes such as downward or rightward) (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can perform steps S904707 to S904709). When the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 100% by executing the first change effect. When the display position of the target specific display is the retracted position, the display mode of the specific display is not changed (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%). With such a configuration, the player can be focused on the operation mode of the specific display, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

(11) In the above (10), the specific display means displays the specific display in a mode involving an operation regardless of whether or not the display mode is changed (for example, the display position (extended position for any specific display). , The retreat position) is switched), and the change suggestion effect executing means can execute the change suggestion effect at different rates depending on the operation mode of the specific display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 is shown in FIG. 72). By executing step S904508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in (C), a change effect (first change effect, second change effect) is generated when the operation frequency is high compared to when the operation frequency is low. Change effect) may be easily performed). With such a configuration, the player can be focused on the operation mode of the specific display.

(12) In the above (10) or (11), the specific display means can switch between the specific operation mode (for example, the advance position) and the non-specific operation mode (for example, the retracted position) to display the specific display ( For example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can execute steps S904704, S904709, and S904710), and when the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed is the specific operation mode, the display of the specific display is performed. It is possible to change the mode (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904713 so as to perform the identification when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position. The display mode of the display can be changed). With such a configuration, the player can be focused on the operation mode of the specific display.

(13) In any one of (10) to (12) above, the change suggestion effect production means is configured to perform a first change suggestion effect (for example, a first change effect) and a second change suggestion effect (for example, a second change effect). It is possible to execute any of the change suggesting effects of a plurality of types of change suggesting effects including and (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes any of the change effects by performing steps S90804, S908006, and S908105. The specific display means can switch between a specific operation mode (for example, an advance position) and a non-specific operation mode (for example, a retracted position) to display the specific display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can: Steps S904704, S904709, and S904710 can be executed), and when the operation mode of the specific display is the specific operation mode when the first change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed (for example, The effect control microcomputer 90100 can change the display mode of the specific display by executing steps S904707 to S904713 when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position. On the other hand, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of the operation mode of the specific display (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904711 to S904713). By doing so, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of whether the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the second change effect is the advance position or the retreat position). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of production.

(14) In any one of the above (10) to (13), it can be suggested that the display state of the specific display controls the advantageous state (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100, in steps S903906 and S903924). , The display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 65 is used to determine the display mode pattern, thereby indicating the reliability of the big hit (white <blue <red) by the display mode, and the specific display by the operation mode of the specific display. It is possible to indicate whether or not the display mode of (1) is changed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the operation frequency using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72C in step S904508. Therefore, the reliability (low frequency<high frequency) for changing the display mode of the specific display depending on the operation frequency may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of production.

(15) In any one of the above (10) to (14), the change suggestion effect executing means has a changed specific display (for example, one shown in FIGS. 78(1) and (2)) whose display mode has already been changed. Change suggestion effect (for example, the second change effect shown in FIGS. 78(1) and (2)) that suggests a change in the display mode of the eye hold display 9052) and the changed specific display are displayed. A change suggesting effect suggesting a change in the display mode of another specific display different from the completed specific display (for example, the second hold display 9053 shown in FIGS. 78(1) and (4)) (for example, FIG. 78(1) ), (4), and (2nd change effect shown in (5)) can be executed in a mode in which at least a part is common (for example, a mode in which the arrow Y flies as shown in FIG. 78(1)). May be With such a configuration, it is possible to make the contents of the effect surprising and improve the effect of the effect.

(16) In any one of the above (10) to (15), the specific display means displays a specific display (for example, a hold display, an active display) corresponding to the variable display at least in a normal mode (for example, “white”). And a first specific mode (for example, “red”) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode that suggests the content of the effect (for example, effect suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion). Mode, pseudo-link suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode)) (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, “white” or “red” or a second special suggestion mode). Hold display can be displayed), and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 79(5) and 79(2)), The specific display means is capable of executing the special zone effect suggested in the special suggestion mode, and the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode and then the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode. When the effect of is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 79, 5 seconds after the special zone effect is started, The hold display 9053 displayed in the second special suggestion mode can be changed to “red”). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the specific aspect.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is the figure which shows one example of production control command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of starting winning determination processing. It is a figure for explaining random number values MR1-MR3. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a special figure reservation storage part. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the determination processing at the time of starting winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table and a big hit classification determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss variation pattern determination table. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of pre-reading processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of pre-reading production execution setting processing. It is the figure which shows the constitution example of the pre-reading production execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a final color determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an expansion mode setting presence determination table. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a timing chart in the case of performing a pending/active change effect and a movable object effect that perform enlarged display. It is the figure which shows the production operation example of movable body production. It is the figure which shows the production operation example of reservation active change production and movable body production. It is the figure which shows the production operation example of reservation change production. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine in other examples of a form from the front. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a game control board (main board). It is the block diagram which shows the circuit constitution example of the production control baseplate, the lamp driver baseplate and the audio output baseplate. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board performs. It is a flow chart which shows 4ms timer interruption processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production design which is prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit judgment table, a small hit judgment table, and a big hit type judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviations. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the variation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the variation category command. It is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a storage buffer. It is the flowchart which shows the production processing at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flowchart showing a process during special symbol variation. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production control main processing which CPU for production control executes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows reservation display control processing. It is an explanatory view showing a display mode pattern determination lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change timing determination lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is the flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the stop design of production design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flow chart which shows operation frequency determination processing. It is an explanatory view showing a change effect execution lottery table, an execution target determination lottery table, and an operation frequency determination lottery table. It is the flowchart which shows the production design fluctuation process in production control process treatment. It is an explanatory view showing a display position switching lottery table. It is the flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the effect display apparatus when a change effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the effect display apparatus when a change effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the effect display apparatus at the time of performing a 2nd change effect in the modification 1. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example in a case where a hold display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode in the modified example 2.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment, showing a layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. On the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven into it.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot-matrix LED (light emitting diode), etc., and are identified in the special symbol game which is an example of the variable display game. Special symbols (also called “special symbols”) that are possible plural types of identification information (special identification information) are variably displayed (variably displayed). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do.

The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns with different combinations of what is turned on and what is turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. Below, the special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". ..

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, respectively. In the decorative pattern display area, which is a plurality of variable display portions such as three, for example, decorative patterns which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, on the screen of the image display device 5, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas are arranged. Then, in the special figure game, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B, The variation of the decorative design (for example, vertical scroll display) is started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas. After that, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol can be changed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas in the image display device 5. The fixed decorative design (final stop design) that is the display result is stopped and displayed. The fixed decorative pattern may be different from the decorative pattern displayed during variable display. For example, a decorative pattern other than the scrolled decorative pattern may be the confirmed decorative pattern.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A, or a special figure game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is synchronized. Then, a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified are variably displayed, and the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means terminating the variable display by displaying the identification information such as the decorative symbol in a stop display (also called a complete stop display or a final stop display). .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result, the variable speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The design may be displayed in a stopped state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion/contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitely displayed, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. Becomes Note that the temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative pattern completely in a stopped state for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing a slight shake or expansion/contraction.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a start prize winning memory display area 5H is arranged. In the starting winning a prize memory display area 5H, a hold display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold storage number) corresponding to the special figure game in a specifiable manner is performed. Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is that the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6B. It is generated based on a winning prize for starting by passing (for example, passing). That is, the starting condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special drawing game and the variable display of the decorative pattern is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. If the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, etc., the variable display corresponding to the established starting condition is suspended. Done. In this embodiment, the hold display is performed by displaying the same number of symbols as the variable display that is being held (in the present embodiment, a circle or the like, and hereinafter also referred to as a hold display symbol). One hold display symbol corresponds to one variable display that is held. The suspended variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is represented by the pending display symbol displayed in the area on the left side of the starting winning memory display area 5H. The suspended variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is represented by the pending display symbol displayed in the area on the right side of the starting winning memory display area 5H.

For example, due to the occurrence of the first start winning game in which the game ball enters the first start winning opening, the starting condition (first starting condition) of the special figure game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is established. If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first starting condition is not established, the first special figure reservation storage number is incremented by 1 (increment ), the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. Moreover, the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is established by the occurrence of the second start prize in which the game ball enters the second start prize hole. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second starting condition is not established, the second special figure reservation storage number is incremented by 1 (increment The execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure reservation storage number is decremented by 1, and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. When is started, the second special figure reservation storage number is decremented by 1.

The variable display pending storage number obtained by adding the first special figure pending storage number and the second special figure pending storage number is also referred to as a total pending storage number in particular. When simply saying "the number of special figure reservation storages", it usually means a concept including all of the number of first special figure reservation storages, the number of second special figure reservation storages, and the total number of reservation storages. The first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number are included, but the total reserved storage number is excluded).

A display device for displaying the number of special figure reservation memories may be provided together with the starting winning prize memory display area 5H or instead of the starting winning prize memory display area 5H. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning a prize memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold storage number in a specifiable manner at the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display device 25A and a second hold display device 25B are provided. The first reserved indicator 25A displays the number of the first special figure reserved memories so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold storage number in a identifiable manner. For example, the first pending display unit 25A and the second pending display unit 25B correspond to the upper limit value (eg, “4”) in each of the first special figure pending storage number and the second special figure pending storage number (for example, 4). Individual LEDs). Here, the first special figure reservation storage number and the second special figure reservation storage number are displayed according to the number of turned-on LEDs.

On the screen of the image display device 5, an active display area 5HA is arranged in proximity to the start winning award memory display area 5H. In the active display area 5HA, a display corresponding to the variable display being executed is performed. The display in the active display area 5HA is referred to as an active display (also referred to as a variable display corresponding display, a display during digestion or a current display). In the active display area 5HA, for example, in response to the start of the special drawing game using the first special drawing when the first start condition is satisfied, the first erased (digested) first start winning memory display area 5H Active display is performed according to the hold display. In addition, in the active display area 5HA, for example, in response to the start of the special drawing game using the second special drawing when the second start condition is satisfied, it is erased (digested) in the second pending storage unit 5HL. Active display is performed according to the second hold display.

A movable body 99 is provided at a predetermined position (here, at the center lower side) in the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 99 is rotated by the rotational drive of the movable body motor 61 shown in FIG.

A normal winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the normal winning ball device 6A. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces which are changed to a closed state which is a vertical position and an open state which is a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form the second starting winning opening.

As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning hole. To On the other hand, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the ON state, so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning port. Put in a state. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is normally open when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning port, while the expanded opening state is when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. Also, the game ball may be configured to be difficult to enter. As described above, the normal variable winning ball device 6B has the first variable state such as the open state or the expanded open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning port, and the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or the difficult entry. It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a normally open state. The first variable state may be a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning opening than the second variable state.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball (prize game medium), and the first special figure reservation storage number is predetermined. If it is at most the upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the number of the second special figure reserved memory is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value. If so, the second start condition is satisfied.

The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 22A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. May be the same or different in number. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or one that gives points corresponding to the number of game balls that become prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific area is changed to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a big prize hole.

As an example, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball enters the special winning opening (for example, You cannot pass. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become. In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily enters, which is advantageous to the player, and a closed state, in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous to the player. Instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily enter the special winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has entered the special winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball enters the special winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, for example, when the game ball enters another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the special winning opening, which is the first state advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the gaming ball into the special winning opening to obtain the winning ball, which is disadvantageous to the player. There are two states.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of 7-segment or dot-matrix LEDs and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, a plurality of types different from the special symbol. A normal pattern (also referred to as a "general drawing" or "normal drawing") that is identification information is variably displayed (variably displayed). Such variable display of normal symbols is called a normal figure game (also called "normal figure game"). Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves as the number of effective passage balls that have passed through the passage gate 41.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as the winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be asked. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that the game ball that has entered one of the general winning openings has been detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is further provided at a peripheral portion of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball as a game medium toward a game area. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to a ball striking device. An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided for holding (storing) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operating stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is applied when the player holds the operating stick). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand (for example, the left hand). It may be configured as follows. It suffices that a trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push/pull operation with respect to the trigger button is built in the operation rod.

A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2) including a tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operation rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the side of the player who faces the pachinko gaming machine 1. Pair) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the central position of the operating rod when viewed from the player's side. The photo sensor may be included.

As a member forming the upper plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 31A) or the like, a push button 31B (which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation, (See FIG. 2). The push button 31B may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor 35B for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13 and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back surface of the game board or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 or the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11, the first special symbol and the second special symbol by performing lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) that configures the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting/lighting/coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc. are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in a detection signal (a detection signal indicating that the passage or entry of a game medium has been detected) from various switches for detecting a game ball and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 uses a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for driving each solenoid such as a signal for turning on or off the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) for a normal electric accessory. To the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and outputs the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R. And various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric parts such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 controls all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the turn-on/turn-off operations in the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. It is provided with a function of determining the control content for causing the electric parts for production, such as a section, to execute a predetermined production operation, and controlling the determined control content.

The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is installed. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, game effect lamps 9, decorative LEDs, etc. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit and the like for driving to turn on/off.

As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a starting port switch (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main substrate 11. The wiring is connected. It should be noted that the various switches may be those having an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as one called a sensor. Further, the main board 11 is connected to a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the like.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. Also, a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like may be included.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. The command 80XX (H) is a production control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol (corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). ). That is, when a unique number is given to each of the fluctuation patterns that can be used, which will be described later, there is a fluctuation command corresponding to each fluctuation pattern specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" shows that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Accordingly, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the command 80XX(H), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of effect symbols.

Command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning opening designation command) for notifying that a game ball has entered the first starting winning opening. Command 8A02 (H) is a production control command (second start winning opening designation command) for notifying that a game ball has entered the second starting winning opening.

The commands 8C01(H) to 8C03(H) are effect control commands indicating the contents of the winning judgment result, and are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the big hit type as the winning judgment result. .. Since the effect control CPU 120 determines the display result of the effect symbol in response to the reception of the commands 8C01(H) to 8C03(H), the commands 8C01(H) to 8C03(H) are referred to as display result designation commands. The command 8C01(H) (display result 1 designation command) designates the loss. The command 8C02 (H) (display result 2 designation command) designates 15R big hit and probability variation. The command 8C03(H) (display result 3 designation command) designates a 15R big hit and non-probability variation.

Command 8D01 (H) is a production control command (first symbol variation start designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a production control command (second symbol variation start designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation start designation command and the second symbol variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specific command (or symbol variation start designation command).

Command 8F00 (H) is a production control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the production symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the production control CPU 120 receives the symbol fixing designation command, the variable display (variable display) of the production symbols is ended and the display result is derived and displayed.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started (during initialization). The command 9200(H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted (during initial setting at restart). When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise, initializes it. Send a command. The command 9F00(H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) that specifies the start of fanfare in the case of a 15-round big hit (start of big hit game state).

In the big hit game state, the fanfare is first executed, and then the special variable winning ball device 7 which is the big winning opening is opened (round game, etc.). The ending is executed after the game. The fanfare is an effect that informs or suggests that the big hit game state has started, that is, the big hit game is about to start. The ending is an effect that notifies that the big hit game state is over, that is, the big hit game is over.

The command A2XX(H) is an effect control command (major winning opening opening designation command) for designating the opening of the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 of the number (round) indicated by XX. A3XX(H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening the special winning opening) for designating the closing of the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 of the number (round) indicated by XX.

Command A601 (H) is a production control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) that designates the start of ending.

Command B000 (H) is a production control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the game state is the normal state (normal game state). Command B001 (H) is a production control command (time saving state designation command) that specifies that the game state is a time saving (advantageous) state. The command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (time saving number specifying command) that specifies the remaining number of times in the time saving (advantageous) state (how many more times the variable display is continued until the time saving state continues). “XX” in the command B1XX(H) indicates the remaining number of times in the time saving (advantageous) state.

Command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (total reserved storage number designating command) that specifies the total reserved storage number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX(H) indicates the total pending storage number. Command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first reserved storage number designation command) for designating the first special figure reserved storage number. “XX” in the command C1XX(H) indicates the first special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XX(H) is an effect control command (second reserved storage number designating command) that specifies the second special figure reserved storage number. “XX” in the command C2XX(H) indicates the second special figure reservation storage number.

The command C6XXH is an effect control command indicating the content of the determination result at the time of winning, and as the determination result at the time of winning, the determination result (variation pattern type) of the determination value range of the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type Is a variation category command indicating (determination result) (each corresponding to variation pattern XX). That is, similar to the variation pattern command, when a unique number is given to each of the variation patterns that can be used, which will be described later, there is a command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a program for game control to perform a control operation, and numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 are provided.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 to temporarily store various data, and the variable data write operation to store various data to the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. The transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

It should be noted that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 is required to include at least the RAM 103 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I/O 105, etc. may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values used to control the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used to control the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, a predetermined random number value is displayed on a random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102. The numerical value may be stored, and the CPU 103 may update the stored value periodically or irregularly to update the random number value.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data, table data, etc. used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals which are various control commands from the main board 11, and a fluctuation pattern table storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns are stored. The constituent table data and the like are stored. The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 temporarily rewritably stores various data used for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program and fixed data, a RAM 122 that provides a work area of the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation, a random number circuit 124 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and an I/O 125. And are installed.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121 to execute the process of controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads fixed data from the ROM 121 for fixed data, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variable data in the RAM 122 for temporary storage, and the effect control CPU 120 stores in the RAM 122. A fluctuation data read operation for reading out various kinds of temporarily stored fluctuation data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12, and an effect control CPU 120 goes to the effect control board 12 outside. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. Wiring for transmitting image data to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control substrate 13, on the effect control substrate 12. To the lamp control board 14, wirings for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating the lamp data are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the operation action of the player for the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A, and a game for the push button 31B. A wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that an operation action of a person is detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected. Furthermore, the effect control board 12 is also connected to a wiring for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to the motor drive circuit 16 for driving the movable body motor 61 for rotating the movable effect body 99. ..

In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used to control such a production operation is also referred to as a production random number.

In the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation are stored in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of determination tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data that configures a determination table, pattern data that configures various production control patterns, and the like. Remembered Production control pattern, for example, from the process data including production control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and end code associated with the production control process timer judgment value It is configured. The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 generates various commands. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the content to be displayed by the image display device 5, and outputs a display control command to the display control unit 123 in accordance with the determination. The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and generates image data. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control for executing variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images displayed in the display screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. Note that the VDP may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing more commonly called DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured.

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 is, for example, an input port for receiving a performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the performance control board 12. It is configured to include and. For example, from the output port of the I/O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14. (Lighting signal), a command (drive control signal) transmitted to the motor drive circuit 16, and the like are output.

With the above configuration, the effect control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to display the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control controls the speakers 8L and 8R via the sound control board 13 to output sound, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED via the lamp control board 14. Is performed, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123, and the movable body motor 61 is driven via the motor drive circuit 16 to move the movable body 99. In this way, various effects (explained later, reach effect, movable effect member effect, message effect in which the image display device 5 displays an image of a message to the player, effect for exciting the game, etc.) are executed. ..

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game is played using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be added based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined ball is launched based on a player performing a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) on a ball operation handle installed on the lower right of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in the device. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area enters the first starting winning opening (first starting area) formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. As a result, the first starting condition is satisfied. Then, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, the previous special figure game or the jackpot gaming state has ended, the special figure game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. To be done.

Further, when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening (second starting area) formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. The second starting condition is satisfied. Then, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, by ending the previous special drawing game or jackpot gaming state, the special drawing game using the second special drawing by the second special symbol display device 4B is started. To be done. However, when the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second start winning port.

Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, the normal symbol starting condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is satisfied. After that, based on the fact that the universal figure start condition for starting the variable display of the regular symbols has been satisfied, such as the previous universal figure game ending, the regular figure game by the regular symbol display device 20 is started. In this public figure game, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time elapses, the fixed normal symbol which is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (normal symbol per symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “universal symbol loss”. In response to the fact that the variable display result of the ordinary symbol is "universal symbol", the opening control and the expansion opening control in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position are performed. The closing control and the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position after a lapse of a predetermined time are performed. Whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is set as “universal symbol hit” as the predetermined specific display result is determined by the variable symbol display result by the ordinary symbol display device 20. Is determined (predetermined) before being derived and displayed.

When a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when a special figure game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, Whether or not to make the variable display result of symbols a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is displayed for derivation. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result or the variation pattern is issued by the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to the production control board 12.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol that is the variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, "left", "middle", "right" decorations arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, variable display of decorative symbols (effect symbols) different from the special symbols is performed. In the special figure game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A, and the special figure game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the fixed special that is the variable display result of the special symbol When the design is derived and displayed, the fixed decorative design which is the variable display result of the decorative design is derived and displayed on the image display device 5.

When a predetermined big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes "big hit" (specific display result), and a value advantageous to the player is given. It is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific game state. That is, whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is "big hit", and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a variable display result of the special symbol, when the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed but the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes “miss”.

As an example, the special symbols indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7" are big hit symbols, and the special symbols indicating the "-" symbols are lost symbols. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big hit symbol and a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol or a lost symbol.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state which is advantageous to the player. Then, the special winning opening is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the special winning opening and generate the winning balls. A round game (also simply referred to as "round") that is opened is executed. In a period other than the execution period of such a round game, the special winning opening is closed, and it becomes difficult or impossible to generate winning balls. When a game ball enters the special winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball at each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, "15") is reached.

When the special figure display result is “big hit”, it includes the case where the big hit type is either “non-probable change” or “probable change”. For example, as a variable display result of the special symbols, when the big hit symbols showing the numbers “3” and “5” are derived and displayed, the big hit type becomes “uncertain change”, and the big hit symbols showing the numbers “7” are derived and displayed. When hit, the jackpot type becomes "probable change". When the jackpot type becomes “non-probable change” or “probable change”, the special variable winning ball device 7 is set as the first state (the special winning opening is open) which is advantageous to the player as a round game in the big hit gaming state. The normal opening round is executed in which the upper limit time to be performed is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds). The jackpot game state in which the normally open round is executed is also called a normally open jackpot state or a first specific game state.

When the special figure display result is “big hit”, it includes the case where the big hit type is either “non-probable change” or “probable change”. For example, as a variable display result of the special symbol, when the big hit symbol indicating the number "3" is derived and displayed, the big hit type becomes "uncertain change", and when the big hit symbol indicating the number "7" is derived and displayed, the big hit. The type is “probability change”. When the jackpot type becomes “non-probable change” or “probable change”, the special variable winning ball device 7 is set as the first state (the special winning opening is open) which is advantageous to the player as a round game in the big hit gaming state. The normal opening round is executed in which the upper limit time to be performed is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds).

After the jackpot game state is over, the probability that the variable display result is a "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to be a probability change state that is higher than the normal state, based on the establishment of a predetermined probability variation control condition. There is. The probability variation state is controlled to continue until a predetermined probability variation ending condition such as the next big hit game state is started. Further, after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the average variable display time may be controlled to a time saving state where it becomes shorter than the normal state. The time saving state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state, and, for example, the average variable display time is different. The time saving state is controlled so as to continue until either one of the time saving end conditions is met first, among the fact that the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state is started. .. It should be noted that the probability variation state is controlled to continue until one of the probability variation termination conditions is met first, among the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state being started. It may be done.

As an example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, the gaming state becomes a time saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “probability change”, after the big hit game state ends, the game state becomes a time saving state and a probability change state.

In the time saving state, the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning opening than in the normal state, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) and the second variable state ( Closed state or normally open state). For example, the control for making the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary figure game by the ordinary symbol display device 20 (general figure variation time) shorter than that in the normal state, or the variable display result of the ordinary symbol in each ordinary figure game is Control for improving the probability of "per drawing" compared to that in the normal state, tilting control time for performing tilting control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is "universal drawing" Is controlled to be longer than that in the normal state, and control to increase the number of tilts than that in the normal state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as "time saving control" or "high base control"). To be done. By controlling to such a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and the special game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

In addition, the time saving state in which the high opening control is performed is also referred to as "high base state", "high base", etc., and the game state which is not the time saving state is also referred to as "low base state", "low base", etc. The probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as “high-accuracy state”, “high-accuracy”, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is also referred to as “low-accuracy state”, “low-accuracy”, and the like. The gaming state when it is in the probability changing state and the time saving state is also referred to as "highly accurate high base state" or "highly accurate high base". The game state when not in the probability changing state but in the time shortening state is also referred to as a "low certainty high base state" or "low certainty high base". The game state when it is in the probability changing state without being in the time saving state is also referred to as "high accuracy low base state" or "high accuracy low base". The normal state that does not become either the time saving state or the probability changing state is also referred to as "low accurate low base state" or "low accurate low base".

The game ball used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the record information of the score given in correspondence with the number thereof may have a valuable value that can be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize according to the number, for example. Good. Alternatively, the recorded information of these game balls and points may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have valuable value that can be used for another game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the game value that can be given in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the payout of a game ball that is a prize ball and the addition of points, and for example, controlling to a big hit game state or a special game state such as a probability variation state. Controlling, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the big hit game state is the first round number (for example, "15") that is larger than the second round number (for example, "7"), and is executed in the time saving state The upper limit number of possible variable displays is the first number (for example, “100”) larger than the second number (for example, “50”), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). It has a high first probability (eg 1/20), and the number of consecutive chans, which is the number of times it is repeatedly controlled to the jackpot gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is higher than the second consecutive chan number (eg “5”). It may be included that a game situation is more advantageous for the player, such as a part or all of a large first consecutive chan number (for example, “10”). Note that the degree of advantage to the player is, for example, a state that is actually advantageous to the player when a certain event occurs (a state where a privilege is given, or a state where the privilege is given, a state where the rate of giving a privilege is high). , A ratio of being in an advantageous state different from a privilege, or a ratio of being in an advantageous state. In addition, the privilege that is shown to be highly likely to be given by the special mode may be the same as the object of the advantage to the player (advantageous state), and is different from the object of the advantage to the player. It may be one.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special figure game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, corresponding to the start of any special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. The period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R In (variable display period), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode.

Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination, the decorative design not yet stopped and displayed (“reach variation design”). (Also referred to as) is a display mode in which the fluctuation continues, or a display mode in which all or some of the decorative patterns are synchronously fluctuating while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (for example, "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) The remaining decorative pattern display area (for example, "medium" decoration) that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern (for example, a decorative pattern showing alphanumeric characters "7") that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. The display pattern in which the decorative pattern is changing in the design display area 5C, etc., or the decorative pattern is a big hit in all or part of the "left", "middle", "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R It is a display mode in which all or a part of the combination is changed while changing in synchronization.

In addition, in response to the reach mode, the fluctuation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the changing mode of the decorative pattern, a performance effect different from that before the reach mode is executed. May be done. The effect operation such as the display of the character image or the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In addition, in the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the voice output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light-emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. before the reach mode is set. The operation mode different from the operation mode may be included.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of kinds of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also called "reliability" or "big hit reliability", "expectation" or "big hit expectation") varies depending on the effect mode in each reach effect. That is, it is possible to change the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, for example, reach effects such as normal, super A, super B, and super C are preset. The reach effects of super A to C in this embodiment are reach effects in which a plurality of characters fight. Below, the reach effects of super A to C are sometimes referred to as super reach A to C, and the normal reach effects are sometimes referred to as normal reach.

As described above, the super reach A to C in this embodiment are reach effects in which a plurality of characters fight. In the super reach A to C, for example, the characters to fight may be different, and the super reach A to C may have different effect modes. In the super A or B, when the predetermined character wins the battle, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and when the predetermined character loses the battle, the variable display result becomes "miss". If super-reach C is executed, super-reach A may be executed after execution of super-reach C (may evolve into super-reach A). If super-reach C is executed but super-reach A is not developed (for example, if a predetermined character loses the battle), the variable display result is "miss". On the other hand, when the super reach A is developed (for example, when a predetermined character wins a battle), the variable display result may be a “big hit”.

Depending on which reach effect has been executed, the variable display result of the variable display may be “big hit” (in the present embodiment, “big hit” in which the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”) ( Big hit expectation) changes. For example, the jackpot expectation is higher when the super reach A to C is executed than when the normal reach is executed. In addition, among the super reach, if the super reach A (including the case where the super reach C is also included) is executed, if the super reach B is executed, or if the super reach C is executed (super reach The expectation for a big hit is higher than the case (when it does not develop into A). On the contrary, when the super reach C is executed, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the super reach B is executed or the super reach A is executed. In this case, the super-reach C may be executed after the execution of the super-reach A (may develop into the super-reach C).

The jackpot expectation degree is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of jackpot)×(probability of being a jackpot)/{(probability that the effect will be performed at the time of jackpot)×(probability of being a jackpot)+(other than at the time of jackpot) The probability that the effect is executed x (probability of not being a big hit)} is calculated (when the big hit expectation level is "1", the variable display result is always a "big hit". Same about degree.).

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be the reach state, the variable display result may be a "big hit", etc. A variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed by a variable display mode of the decorative pattern. Although description is omitted in this embodiment for ease of understanding, variable display effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-link” can be executed. Whether or not the variable display effect such as “slip” or “pseudo-link” is to be executed should be determined in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is executed on the effect control board 12 side may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main board 11 side.

In the variable display effect of "slip", after changing the decorative design in all of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a plurality of decorative design display areas (for example, After the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the temporary design display area is displayed. By changing the decorative pattern again in the decorative pattern display area (for example, either or both of the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R), the display is stopped. The effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed. In this way, in the variable display effect of "slip", a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, and then the predetermined number is displayed. By performing the variable display for the decorative pattern again, when the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and when the decorative pattern forming the non-reach combination is not stopped and the stop state is displayed. is there.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo run", the variable display is started after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being satisfied once. Before the finalized decorative design as a result is derived and displayed, after temporarily displaying the decorative design in all of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, The effect display for changing (re-changing) the decorative pattern again in all the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of pseudo-continuous variations in this embodiment is “left”, “middle”, and “right” excluding the initial variations from the start of variable display of decorative designs until the first temporary suspension of all decorative designs. The number of times the decorative pattern changes again in all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, one of a plurality of predetermined pseudo-run chances Once the decorative pattern constituting the is temporarily displayed as a predetermined display result, after that, the variable display (re-fluctuation) is performed again. The pseudo consecutive chances may include a combination of decorative patterns which is a predetermined non-reach combination, instead of the variable display mode of decorative patterns being the reach mode. Further, the pseudo consecutive chances may include a combination of decorative patterns which becomes a predetermined reach-miss combination (simply referred to as “reach combination”) after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode. For example, in the pseudo continuous chance eye, the decorative pattern (middle pattern) stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C is a special decorative pattern (pseudo continuous chance pattern) that is not used in the variable display of the decorative pattern in the normal time. ) Is good. Among the decorative patterns that are also used in the variable display of the decorative patterns at the normal time, a pseudo continuous chance pattern that is a pseudo continuous chance by being stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C may be included. ..

In the variable display effect of "pseudo continuous", the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed a plurality of times based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by the change (pseudo continuous change) being performed again. You can make it appear as if it was started continuously.

As the variable display effect using the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, in addition to "slip" and "pseudo-relation", for example, "developing opportunity eye", "development opportunity eye end", "chance eye stop slip" Various effect operations such as the above may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of "development opportunity eye", from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the derivation display of the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result, "left", "middle", "right" In all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative patterns constituting the development chance eyes included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and then the variable display state of the decorative patterns is reached. As a predetermined reach effect is started. As a result, when the decorative pattern that constitutes the development opportunity is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes the "big hit" after the reach state. Expectations are increased.

Further, in the variable display effect of "end of development opportunity", after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, all of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are displayed. The effect display for deriving and displaying the decorative pattern of a predetermined combination as the development opportunity item as the fixed decorative pattern is performed. In the variable display effect of "slip after opportunity stop", similarly to the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", from when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started until the fixed decorative pattern which is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, after temporarily displaying the decorative patterns of the miss combination (special combination) to be the pseudo consecutive chance, in all, Unlike the variable display effect of "pseudo-run" in which the decorative pattern is changed again in all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the decorative pattern is changed again in a part of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. By doing so, effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

Further, during the variable display of the decorative design, unlike the reach effect or the variable display effect such as “pseudo-relation”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, a message image is displayed as a message, or voice output is performed. , The variable display state of the decorative pattern may be the reach state due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, the reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility that "is a big hit".

The presentation operation, which is the notice production, is the variable display mode of the decorative pattern after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in all of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. May be executed (started) before the change to the reach mode (before the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R). Further, the notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include what is executed after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be a jackpot gaming state at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started until the fixed special symbol or the fixed decorative symbol which is the variable display result is derived. Anything that can announce the sex will do. A plurality of advance notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation (effect mode) when executing such advance notice effect.

The notice production includes a look-ahead notice production (also referred to as a look-ahead production). In the pre-reading notice production, the variable display result is a "big hit" before the variable display is executed, which is a target (preliminary subject) for which the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is executed. It is a notice production that can announce the possibility of becoming. In particular, the look-ahead notice effect that continuously gives a notice over the variable display of the decorative pattern that is executed a plurality of times corresponding to a plurality of special drawing games is also called a continuous notice effect. In the pre-reading notice production, before the variable display to be announced is started, for example, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is announced based on, for example, the pending memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start winning. The staging operation is started.

For example, by changing the display of the hold display in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H to a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time as the prefetch notice effect, there is a possibility of a “big hit” in the variable display subject to the notice. A look-ahead notice effect of "change of pending display" is executed to give a notice such as. More specifically, the display color of the display portion that can display the number of special figure reservation storages is specified by a specific color (for example, red, green, blue, or white) different from a predetermined color (for example, gray) in the normal state. Etc.) or a shape (for example, a star shape) different from the normal shape (for example, a round shape), as long as it is possible to notify that the variable display result is more likely to be a “big hit” than usual. In addition, the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" by setting the display pattern of the hold display in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H to a specific pattern (for example, a cherry tree pattern) different from the normal time. May be notified. Alternatively, by setting a display mode in which a predetermined message (for example, "secret" etc.) is displayed as the hold display, it is possible to notify (suggest) that the display color is more likely to change to a specific color than usual. Good. The hold display that suggests that such a display form is likely to change to the specific form is also referred to as a suggestion hold display. The look-ahead notice effect of "change of hold display" is also called a hold change effect. In contrast to the prefetch notice effect, the notice effect that starts execution after the variable display subject to the notice is started is an independent notice effect (also referred to as an independent notice, the variation notice, or a notice during variable display). Is called. In this embodiment, as a look-ahead effect of "change of hold display", an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is performed so that it is possible to recognize which hold the variable display to be noticed is. There is a case to be seen. Specifically, an action effect that shows an effect image showing a character (change effect character) prepared in advance on the screen of the image display device 5 and exerts an effect on the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the subject of advance notice. By carrying out, it becomes possible to recognize which of the variable displays to be notified is on hold. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, in this embodiment, the execution display of the action effect (the timing at which it is possible to recognize which of the variable displays that are the notice targets can be recognized) is changed to the hold display that is the notice target. Although the timing of the first shift is set, the execution timing of the action effect may be determined at any of a plurality of shift timings or at different ratios depending on the variable display result. In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the look-ahead effect of the "holding display change" in this embodiment, there is a case where the action effect is performed and a case where the action effect is not performed. The character is not displayed, and the mode is changed so that it is possible to recognize which of the pending variable displays to be foretold.

The look-ahead notice effect executed based on the occurrence of the start winning is executed (started) after the start prize occurs and before the player can determine whether the notice content by the look-ahead notice effect is realized. Anything will do. For example, the pre-reading notice production that gives a notice that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state due to the occurrence of a start winning is at least the variable display state of the decorative pattern based on the occurrence of the starting prize becomes the reach state (or the non-reach state). It may be executed (started) before. In addition, the look-ahead announcement effect that predicts that the variable display result may be a "big hit" due to the occurrence of a certain start winning is at least in a variable display based on the occurrence of the starting prize rather than the fixed decorative design being stopped and displayed. It may be executed (started) before.

In this embodiment, as an example of the single notice effect, the display of the effect image in the active display area 5HA is changed to a display mode different from the display mode at the normal time, so that the "big hit" is displayed in the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied. A notice effect of "active display change" is given to give a notice of the possibility that "" will occur. More specifically, the display color in the active display area 5HA is not a specific color (for example, red, green, blue, white, or the like) different from a predetermined color (for example, gray) in normal time, or a shape for normal time. It suffices to notify that the variable display result is more likely to be a “big hit” than usual by using different shapes. In addition, by setting the icon displayed in the active display area 5HA to a specific icon different from the normal round solid color, a message such as "?", "chance", or "heat" is notified, It is only necessary to be able to suggest the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit". In addition, the icon displayed in the active display area 5HA includes, for example, an icon for notifying a message such as "NEXT" and notifying that the pseudo link variation in the variable display effect of "pseudo link" is executed. Good. The notice effect of "active display change" is also called active change effect.

Specifically, in the active change effect in this embodiment, an effect image showing a character (change effect character) prepared in advance (effect image displayed during the hold display effect) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Then, the display color is changed by performing the effect on the display (active display) of the active display area 5HA at the timing when the hold display of the notice target (hold display of the target of the hold change effect) shifts (shifts) to the active display area 5HA. May be changed, and the display color of the active display may be changed without the effect production being performed. As described above, in this embodiment, an effect of changing the display mode is performed as the hold change effect so that it is possible to recognize which of the variable displays to be notified is on hold. Then, the active change effect is performed as the single notice effect, the hold display having the changed display mode is moved to the active display area 5HA, and the display color is changed. That is, first, the notice subject is shown in the hold change effect, and the display color changes in the active change effect (a big hit expectation degree is suggested), and this series of effects (hold change effect and active change effect) In this embodiment, it is called a hold/active change effect. In addition, in this embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, the player is able to recognize the notice target in the pending change effect, and the jackpot expectation is suggested in the active change effect (that is, in the active change effect). Although the example in which the display color changes for the first time) is shown, the display color may be changed in the hold change effect to suggest the jackpot expectation. Specifically, the display color may be changed in the hold change effect, and the display color may not be changed in the active change effect. Alternatively, the display color may be changed in the hold change effect and further displayed in the active change effect. You may change the color. For example, in the hold change effect, the display color is changed step by step every time the hold display is shifted (including the case where it is not changed even if it is shifted), and the active change effect is further displayed when it is shifted to the active display area 5HA. You may change the color (you may produce a gaze). Further, in the hold/active change effect in this embodiment, all hold displays and active displays that are being displayed, including the hold display that is the subject of advance notification, may be enlarged and displayed. As will be specifically described later, in the hold/active change effect, when the hold/active change effect in which the display color changes to green or red is started, the hold/active change effect is displayed for a period until the end. All of the hold display and active display of may be enlarged (display is not performed in the hold/active change effect in which the display color changes to white or blue). When the hold/active change effect that is displayed in an enlarged manner is started, a small screen as a specific display area is displayed in the image display device 5, and an image displayed in the hold/active change effect (for example, hold display) is displayed. And active display, character images in action effects, etc.) are all displayed on a small screen as a specific display area. The small screen display ends when the hold/active change effect ends (display control in the specific display area ends). The various images displayed on the small screen may have the same ratio as the image displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, the screen size of the image display device 5 is 10 and the screen size of the small screen). Is 1, the image displayed on the small screen may have a ratio of 1/10 of the size displayed on the image display device 5). Further, in this embodiment, when the enlarged display is not performed, the action effect is not performed in the hold/active change effect, but, for example, the effect effect is performed by displaying a small character image, The effect production may be performed in a mode different from the case of performing the enlarged display.

Further, in this embodiment, as the prefetching notice effect, the movable body is displayed every time the variable display is performed until the variable display corresponding to the notice-targeted hold is performed (including the noticeable hold-variable display). A movable body effect for rotating 99 is executed. Specifically, the movable body effect is executed in a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the reservation target is performed, and is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of each variable display. At that time, the image display device 5 displays an effect image and effectively displays that the movable body 99 is operating.

That is, in this embodiment, two types of look-ahead effects such as the hold/active change effect and the movable body effect are executed, but these may be performed individually or may be performed in an overlapping manner. It should be noted that the movable-body special effect refers to the movable-body effect when the hold/active change effect in which enlarged display is performed and the movable-object effect are performed in an overlapping manner. In the movable body special effect, the effect image is displayed on the small screen as the specific display area displayed on the image display device 5. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the movable body 99 is rotating, and prevents the hold display and the active display from becoming unrecognizable.

When the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbols in the special symbol game, is “big hit”, the fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the same decorative pattern is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is sufficient if the decorative pattern is derived and displayed.

When the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", a fixed decorative design that is a non-probable variation jackpot combination may be derived. The fixed decorative design which is the non-probable variation big hit combination is, for example, the design number variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" in the image display device "1". ~ Among the decorative patterns of "8", any one of the decorative patterns having the even number "2", "4", "6", "8" is "left", "middle", "right" In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, they are stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line, and may be a type of a fixed decorative pattern that is a big hit combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” that constitute the non-probability variation jackpot combination are called non-probability variation symbols.

When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, a definite decorative pattern that is a non-probable variation jackpot combination may be derived, or a definite decorative pattern that is a probable variation jackpot combination may be derived. The fixed decorative symbols which are the probability variation big hit combinations are, for example, the symbol numbers variably displayed in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the image display device 5 are “1” to Of the decorative patterns of "8", any one of the decorative patterns having the odd number "1", "3", "5", "7" is "left", "middle", "right" The decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed in line on a predetermined effective line, and may be a type of a fixed decorative design that is a big hit combination. Decorative symbols having odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "7" that constitute the probability variation big hit combination are called probability variation patterns.

The re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern in which the fixed decorative pattern is the non-probable-variable big-hit combination or the probable-variable big-hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after temporarily displaying the decorative patterns to be the uncertain variation jackpot combination in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “ Left, "middle", "right" in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R is changed again with the same decorative pattern being aligned, and a decorative pattern (probably variable pattern) that is a probability variation big hit combination, and Of the decorative patterns (non-probability variation pattern) that are a combination of the probability variation big hits, one of them is stopped and displayed (final stop display) as the fixed decoration pattern. Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the type of jackpot is "non-probable variation", as the re-lottery effect, the decoration pattern which is the non-probable variation jackpot combination is re-varied after re-changing the decoration pattern that is temporarily displayed. A re-lottery drawing effect is performed in which the symbols are derived and displayed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "probability variation", as the re-lottery effect, the ornamental symbols that have been temporarily stopped and displayed are re-varied, and the definite variation jackpot combination is set. The re-lottery winning effect that displays symbols as a stop may be executed, or the re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

When the jackpot type becomes "probable variation", the decorative pattern that is a non-probable variation jackpot combination is once displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the re-lottery effect is executed during the variable display, and the subsequent jackpot gaming state. At the end of the medium or big hit game state, a big hit medium promotion effect may be executed, and the start of the control in the probability changing state may be notified. In the big hit game state, during the execution of the round in the big hit game state, during the execution of the round in the big hit game state, the period from the end of one round in the big hit game state until the start of the next round During the period from the end of the final round to the start of the next variable display game, a probability change notification is made as to whether or not to control the probability change state. The notification effect similar to the promotion effect during the big hit may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the big hit game state. The jackpot mid-promotion production that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is sometimes called "ending promotion production". The start of the control in the probable state may be notified without executing the re-lottery effect and the jackpot promotion effect.

When the special figure display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the decorative patterns that form the predetermined non-reach combination are stopped and displayed, resulting in the non-specific display result. In some cases, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes Further, when the special figure display result is "miss", the decorative pattern forming the predetermined reach combination (also called "reach-miss combination") is stopped and displayed after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode. As a result, the fixed decorative pattern which is the non-specific display result may be displayed in a derived manner.

Next, the main operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing which is game control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 makes necessary initialization after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, the RAM 102 is cleared, for example. Also, the register setting of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, the interrupt is permitted and then the loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed and then the loop process may be entered.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt process, for example, switch process, main side error process, information output process, game random number update process, special symbol process process, normal symbol process process, command control process, such as the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It includes a process for controlling the progress of the.

The switch process is a process of determining the states of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and issuing a warning if necessary according to the result of the diagnosis. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. It may be included (see FIG. 6). The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as the "big hit" to the big hit game state, and "1". Can take any value from "65535". The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types such as "non-probable variation" or "probable variation" when the variable display result is "big jackpot". It is a random number value and can take any value from "1" to "100". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance, and is “1” to “251”. Can take any of the values.

In the special symbol process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display on the special symbol display device 4 is performed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform operation control and opening/closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process controls the display operation on the normal symbol display device 20 (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED), the variable display of the normal symbol and the tilting operation setting of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Is a process that enables

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in the special symbol process process or the ordinary symbol process process, the transmission setting of the control command (effect control command etc.) is set to the command transmission table (preliminarily set in the ROM 101 for each command) according to the effect control command to be transmitted. .) of the ROM 101 (for example, the value of the storage address is stored in a transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102) in the ROM 101, and in the command control processing, it is provided in the RAM 102. Of the output ports included in the I/O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer (for example, a value indicating a storage address in the ROM 101) and the like. After setting the control data to the output port for transmitting the effect control command, predetermined control data is set to the output port of the effect control INT signal to turn on the effect control INT signal for a predetermined time and then to the off state. By doing so, it is possible to transmit the effect control command (effect control command for which transmission is set) based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after setting the interrupt enable state.

FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 firstly, based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A, the first starting opening. It is determined whether the switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure reservation storage number, which is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4") is determined (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area (such as the game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102, to retain the first special figure reservation. It suffices if the number of memories can be specified. When the first special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the starting opening which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting unit etc.) The buffer value is set to "1" (step S203).

Normally, when the first starting opening switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; No), and when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on ( Step S204). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is turned on (step S204; Yes), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the number of hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4") is determined (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the second reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in a predetermined area (such as the game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102, to suspend the second special figure reservation. It suffices if the number of memories can be specified. When the number of second special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the starting port buffer value is set to "2" (step S206). When the second starting opening switch 22B is not turned on (step S204; No) or the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit value (step S205; Yes), the starting winning determination process is ended.

After performing either of the processes of steps S203 and S206, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the starting opening buffer value is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first holding storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second holding storage count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by one (increment) when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the first special drawing is satisfied. ) To be updated. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1 (incremented when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the second special drawing is established). ) To be updated. At this time, the total reserved storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved storage number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit or the like), is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S208).

After executing the processing of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 and random data provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102 are updated by a random counter or the like, and a random number for determining a special figure display result is selected. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (see FIG. 6). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure pending storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the pending data is set in the first special figure pending storage unit as shown in FIG. 7(A). On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the pending data is set in the second special figure pending storage unit as shown in FIG. 7(B).

The first special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 7(A) has not yet started, although the game ball has entered the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning has occurred. The pending data of the special figure game (special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit associates the winning number into the first start winning opening (the order of detecting the game balls) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the first start condition by the entry of the game balls. The number of storages of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the like extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 as reserved data Is stored until reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the first special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game ( It is possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control the jackpot gaming state based on the special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a specific mode (for example, reach effect of super reach). It becomes the pending storage information.

The second special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 7B has not yet started, although the game ball has entered the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning has occurred. Stores pending data of a non-special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning number in the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game balls) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game balls. The number of random numbers MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. It is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The pending data thus stored in the second special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game ( It is possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control the jackpot gaming state based on the special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a specific mode (for example, reach effect of super reach). It becomes the pending storage information.

Subsequent to the process of step S210, the CPU 103 performs a start winning determination process (step S211). The start winning determination process is a process for so-called prefetching. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol normal processing (step S110 of FIG. 4, FIG. 9) described later causes the special symbol display result (variable symbol display result). Is determined as a "big hit" and whether or not to control the big hit game state is determined. Further, in a fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 4, FIG. 11) described later, a fluctuation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning determination process of step S211 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). , Whether or not the special figure display result of the special figure game executed by this start winning is a "big hit", and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern executed by this start winning is a display mode involving reach It is determined whether or not As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning opening is started, the special symbol display result is "big hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Is predicted to be a display mode with reach, and based on this prediction result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side changes the color of the hold display or the color of the hold change effect or the active display. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the active change effect that changes the.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process. For example, the CPU 103 first confirms the states of a time saving flag (a flag that is turned on in the time saving state) and a probability variation flag (a flag that is turned on in the probability variation state) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time reduction state when the time saving flag is on, and determines the normal state when both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Just specify that.

Following the processing of step S401, the CPU 103 selects a table prepared corresponding to the current game state from among a plurality of special figure display result determination tables prepared in advance by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101. It is selected and set in the use table (step S402). A plurality of special figure display result determination tables are prepared according to whether the game state is the probability change state or the like. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10A, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates that the special figure display result is “big hit”. It suffices that it is assigned to the determination result as to whether to be “miss”.

For example, as the special figure display result determination table, a special figure display result determination table (see FIG. 10A) corresponding to the non-probable change state and the probable change state is prepared. Of these tables, the CPU 103 reads the table corresponding to the current game state from the ROM 101 to the RAM 102, and sets the table as the usage table.

After that, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S209 of FIG. 5 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special jackpot display result of "jackpot" in the use table set in the process of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 with each determination value one by one. By doing so, it is sufficient to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the big hit determination range. It suffices to be able to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the hold data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a “jackpot” (a jackpot start determination). ..

When it is determined in step S403 that the variable display result is not within the jackpot determination range (step S403; No), the CPU 103 displays the display result designation command (determination at the time of starting winning). A transmission setting for transmitting a command specifying "miss" as a display result of the results to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S405).

When it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot type determination table prepared by being stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the numerical value (determined value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination indicates that the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”. It may be assigned to the determination result of which one. The CPU 103 sets the jackpot type assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR2 as the determination result of this time. A display result designation command (a command for designating “probable variation” or “non-probable variation” “big hit” as a display result of the determination results at the time of winning a start) is produced in accordance with the determination result of the process of step S409. Transmission settings for transmission to 12 are performed (step S410).

After executing any of the processes of steps S405 and S410, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category command (a command that designates a variation category in the determination result at the time of winning a start) to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S413).

After step S413, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the start winning opening designation command (step S414). The first start winning a prize designation command here is the effect control board 12 as the effect control information for notifying the increase in the number of the first special figure reservation storages when the first starting condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first starting prize. Sent to. In addition, the second start winning a prize opening designation command of the effect control board 12 is effect control information for notifying an increase in the number of the second special figure reservation storages when the second starting condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start winning. Sent to the side. After step S414, the winning determination process ends.

Again, it returns to FIG. 5 and demonstrates. After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the starting opening buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S212). At this time, if the starting mouth buffer value is "2" (step S212; "2"), the starting mouth buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S213), and then the winning a prize for starting. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "1" (step S212; "1"), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S214). The process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting prize for a game ball, the processing based on the detection of both effective starting prizes can be surely completed.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 executes steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag setting unit or the like). Select and execute one of the above processes.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, based on the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the first special symbol reservation storage unit and the second special symbol reservation storage unit, the first special symbol display device 4A and It is determined whether or not to start the special drawing game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit", the variable display result is Determined (predetermined) before being displayed for derivation. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is decided to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probable change” or “probable change”. The jackpot type is stored by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, a game control buffer setting unit). Further, in the special symbol normal processing, corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the fixed special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (big hit symbol, Any of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is predetermined.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 4 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (step S231). The second special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 may read the second storage count value and determine whether the read value is “0”.

When the number of second special figure reservation storages is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; No), for example, the head area of the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the storage area corresponding to the reservation number "1") Numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out as the reserved data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (step S232). As a result, the game random number extracted in response to the occurrence of the starting winning (the second starting winning) at the second starting winning opening in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 5 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Subsequent to the processing of step S232, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second reserved storage number count value and the second special figure reserved storage number is decremented by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage is also updated. The contents stored in the copy are shifted (step S233). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the suspension number “1” (storage area corresponding to the suspension numbers “2” to “4”) in the second special figure suspension storage unit is moved upward by one entry. shift. Further, in the process of step S233, the total pending storage number (total pending storage number count value) is updated by subtracting one. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to "2" (step S234).

When the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (step S235). The first special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 may read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure pending storage number is "0", and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, regardless of whether it is the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, if the special figure game is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening The starting opening data indicating which of the second starting winning opening the game ball has entered is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in association with the holding data or separately from the holding data in association with the holding number. For the special figure game corresponding to each hold data, the order in which the starting conditions are satisfied may be specified.

Subsequent to the processing of step S236, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value, and the first special figure reserved storage number is also decremented by 1, and the first special figure reserved storage is also performed. The contents stored in the copy are shifted (step S237). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the suspension number “1” (storage area corresponding to the suspension numbers “2” to “4”) in the first special figure suspension storage unit is moved upward by one entry. shift. In addition, in the process of step S237, the total pending storage number (total pending storage number count value) is updated by subtracting one. Then, the variable special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After performing either of the processing of steps S234 and S238, the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol is determined to be either "big hit" or "miss" (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10A, a numerical value (decision value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates that the special figure display result is “big hit”. It suffices to be assigned to the determination result of whether to be “miss” depending on whether or not the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state (whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state). The CPU 103 reads out the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result included in the random numbers for game temporarily stored in the random number buffer for fluctuations in step S232 or S236 from the random number buffer for fluctuations, and the gaming state is in the positive change state. By referring to the special figure display result determination table set in the use table based on whether or not there is and the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR1, it is disturbed depending on whether or not the game state is the probability change state. The determination result of either "big hit" or "miss" assigned to the determination value corresponding to the numerical value MR1 may be determined as the special figure display result. The CPU 103 determines that the probability variation control is performed when a probability variation flag (a flag that turns on in the probability variation state) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, a game control flag setting unit) is on. do it. For example, when the random number value MR1 is “9000”, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the probability variation flag is in the ON state (when there is the probability variation control), and the probability variation flag is When it is in the OFF state (when there is no probability variation control), it is determined that the special figure display result is “miss”.

As shown in FIG. 10(A), when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is higher than that in the normal state or the time saving state when the probability variation control is not performed. It is decided as "big hit". Therefore, for example, by the jackpot ending process of step S117 shown in FIG. 4 (details will be described later), the probability variation flag is set to the ON state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is “probability variation”. , When the current gaming state is the probability variation state, the special figure display result is more likely to be "big hit" and is likely to be the big hit gaming state than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state.

After that, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is “big hit” (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; Yes), a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is set to an on state (step S241). ..

Further, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, the jackpot type determination table shown in <1>, which is prepared by being stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance, is selected and set in the use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, the determination result as to whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types (“probable variation” or “non-probable variation”) according to a numerical value (determined value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. Need only be assigned to (see FIG. 10B). The CPU 103 reads, from the random number buffer for variation, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type included in the random numbers for gaming temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S232 or S236, and then determines the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in the usage table based on the numerical data indicating, any one of the jackpot types assigned to the determined value corresponding to the random number value MR2 may be selected. For example, when the random number value MR2 is “75”, the CPU 103 determines (selects) “probable variation” as the jackpot type.

After executing the process of step S242, the big hit type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103, in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, a game control buffer setting unit), sets a jackpot type buffer setting value (for example, as shown in FIG. The big hit type may be stored by storing "0" in the case of "probability change" and "1" in the case of "probability change".

If the special figure display result is not "big hit" in step S240 (step S240; No), after executing the processing of steps S241 to S243, the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game Is determined (step S246). As an example, when it is determined that the special symbol display result is not "big hit" in steps S240 and S244, the special symbol previously determined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure display result is the "big hit" in step S240, a plurality of types of big hits are determined according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242 (depending on the big hit type buffer setting value). Any of the special symbols previously determined as the symbols may be determined as the confirmed special symbol.

After executing the process of step S246, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" (step S247), the special symbol normal process is ended. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" in step S247 and the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

If the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S235 (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demo display setting (step S248), the special symbol Normal processing ends. In this demo display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it has been transmitted to the board 12. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting ends. When the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the production control board 12 displays a demo screen.

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types, based on the result of the determination in advance as to whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". Since the variation pattern specifies the variable display content (variable display mode) of the decorative design, the content of the variable display of the decorative design is determined by this determination. The variable display time of the special design or the decorative design is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the derivation of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result is determined. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” when the variable display result is “miss”. Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is “miss” in the variation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Further, the fluctuation pattern setting process may include a process for setting the special symbol display device 4 to start the fluctuation of the special symbol. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S111 of FIG. 4 as the variation pattern setting processing. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is "big hit" is determined (step S262).

When the big hit flag is off in step S261, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is "miss" (step S265).

FIG. 12 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, in the case where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and the reach mode that does not reach the reach mode. It corresponds to each case of "reach", and corresponds to the case where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable change" or "probable change". Variation patterns are prepared in advance.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is “miss” and the variation patterns designating “non-reach” are the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-3 for normal time (non-time saving) and the variation for time saving. Patterns PB1-1 and PB1-2 are prepared.

Further, there are prepared variation patterns whose contents correspond depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” (the big hit type is “probable change” or “non-probable change” “big hit”) and “miss”. Specifically, a variation pattern PA2-1 (for losing) and a variation pattern PA3-1 (“big hit”) that specify execution of normal reach are prepared. Further, a variation pattern PA2-2 (for loss) and a variation pattern PA3-2 (“big hit”) that specify execution of the super reach A are prepared. Further, a variation pattern PA2-3 (for loss) and a variation pattern PA3-3 (“big hit”) that specify execution of the super reach B are prepared. Further, a variation pattern PA2-4 (for loss) and a variation pattern PA3-4 (“big hit”) that specify to execute the super reach C and then develop into the super reach A are prepared.

In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined by using, for example, the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in the big hit variation pattern determination table, the value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is common in both cases of the big hit type being “non-probable variation” or “probable variation”. It may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern.

The CPU 103 refers to the big hit variation pattern determination table on the basis of the numerical value data indicating the variation pattern determination random number MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby the variation assigned to the determination value corresponding to the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the variation pattern used this time. For example, when the random number value MR3 is “140”, the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern PA3-3.

In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 11, the variation pattern of the misalignment prepared in advance corresponding to the normal state in which the gaming state is the normal state and the case in which the gaming state is the short-time state and the short-time control is performed. The variation table at the time of losing is determined using the determination table. For example, whether it is during the time saving is specified by whether or not a time saving flag (a flag that turns on in the time saving state) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, a game control flag setting unit) is on. If it is not during the time saving (when the time saving flag is in the off state), the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined using the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. On the other hand, during the time saving (when the time saving flag is in the ON state), the variation pattern at the time of losing is determined using the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG.

In each loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the variation pattern determination result in accordance with the total number of pending storages. The total pending storage number may be specified, for example, from the total pending storage number count value that is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter, the total value of the first pending storage number count value and the second pending storage number count value, or the like. ..

The CPU 103 determines whether the normal time and the time saving time are based on whether or not it is in the time saving time, the total pending storage number count value, and the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination read from the fluctuation random number buffer. By referring to any one of the loss variation pattern determination tables according to the above, the total pending storage number is "0" to "1", "2" to "4", "5" to "8" when the total pending storage number is not in the time saving period. The variation pattern assigned to the decision value corresponding to the random number value MR3 in accordance with which of the following, “0”, “1”, and “2” to “8” during the time saving period. May be determined (selected) as the variation pattern used this time.

For example, when the random number value MR3 is “229” when the time saving flag is in the ON state, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern PA2-1 when the total pending storage number count value is “0”, and the total pending The variation pattern PB1-1 is selected when the storage count value is "1", and the variation pattern PB1-2 is selected when the total pending storage count value is any of "3" to "8".

After executing any of the processes of steps S262 and S265 shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 sets a special figure variation time which is a variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure variation time is set in advance corresponding to a plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the processing of steps S262 and S265.

Subsequent to the processing of step S266, the CPU 103 executes the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B. Among them, the setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the special figure games in which the start condition is satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. When the variable display using the first special figure is started, the CPU 103 controls the first reservation indicator 25A to display the first special figure reservation storage number that is subtracted by one. The hold display 25A may be used (for example, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1). When the variable display using the second special figure is started, the CPU 103 controls the second pending indicator 25B to display the second special figure pending storage number, which is subtracted by one, as a second display. The hold display 25B may be used (for example, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1).

After executing the process of step S267, the transmission setting of the command at the start of variation of the special symbol is performed (step S268). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a first symbol variation start designation command, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11. Set the transmission settings for sequentially transmitting the number of reserved storage designation commands. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a second symbol variation start designation command, variation pattern command, display result designation command, second command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Set the transmission settings for sequentially transmitting the number of reserved storage designation commands. The set command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing described above after the special symbol process processing is completed. The first symbol fluctuation start designation command and the second symbol fluctuation start designation command here are transmitted as hold notification information that specifies which of the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number has decreased. To be done.

After the process of step S268 is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S269), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is ended. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S269, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol fluctuation processing, the processing which changes the special symbol in the 1st special symbol display device 4A or the 2nd special symbol display device 4B, and the process which measures the elapsed time after the special symbol starts changing It is included. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the special symbol is changed. The fixed special symbol that is the variable display result of the symbol (the fixed special symbol set in step S110) is stopped (displayed), and when the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol is stopped (displayed). The transmission setting of the symbol confirmation designation command which is a production control command for notifying that the special figure process flag is updated to "3". The symbol confirmation designation command that is set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing described above after the special symbol process processing is completed. By repeatedly executing step S112, variable display of special symbols, derivation display of fixed special symbols, and the like are realized.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In the special symbol stop process, the process of determining whether the big hit flag is in the on state, or when the big hit flag is in the on state, the time saving flag and the probability variation flag are turned off, and a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting) The count value of the time saving counter that counts the remaining number of variable displays executed during time saving control, which is provided in a section or the like, is set to "0", and a big hit start production waiting time (corresponding to the start of the big hit game state) It is the waiting time until the execution of the effect is started, which is a predetermined time.), and the start of the big hit game state is designated based on the fact that the special map display result is "big hit". This includes processing for setting transmission of a designated command (production control command) and updating the special figure process flag to "4". The special symbol stop process includes a process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to “0” when the big hit flag is not on.

The command set for transmission is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control processing after the special symbol process processing is completed.

Through a series of these processes, the time saving state and the probability changing state are temporarily ended at the time of a big hit, and the remaining variable display that can be executed during the time saving is reduced “once” at the time of losing. When the remaining variable display that can be executed during the time saving becomes “0” times, the time saving flag is turned off and the time saving state ends. That is, the time saving state (time saving control) ends when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (the initial count value described below) which is set in advance before the variable display result becomes a "big hit" from the start. If the game state is changed, the effect control board 12 is notified of the changed game state.

The big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening pre-processing includes that the variable display result is "big hit" and that the round game start timing has come (for example, that the big hit start effect waiting time set above has elapsed. ) And the like, the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state to open the special winning opening, the process of starting the measurement of the elapsed time from the open state, and the like are included. In this process, for example, depending on whether the big hit type is "non-probable change" or "probable change" (which can be specified by the big hit type buffer setting value stored in the big hit type buffer), the special winning opening is opened. The upper limit of the period may be set. As an example, by setting the upper limit of the period for which the special winning opening is in the open state to "29 seconds" in accordance with the jackpot type "non-probable change" or "probable change", the normal opening round is executed. do it. When processing such as opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". By repeating step S114, the waiting until the start timing of the round game and the opening of the special winning opening are realized.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. To determine whether it is the time to return from the open state to the closed state (or may be partially open state), and the timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state ( A process of returning the special winning opening to a closed state when it is determined that the number has reached a predetermined number (for example, 9) or the elapsed time has reached the upper limit period set in step S114) , The process of starting the measurement of the elapsed time after returning to the closed state, etc. are included. Then, when the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". By repeating step S115, the open state of the special winning opening is maintained until the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big hit opening post processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round game to open the big winning opening has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or if the maximum winning number has not been reached, It includes processing for measuring the elapsed time after returning to the closed state. Then, when the next round game is started, for example, when the measured elapsed time becomes the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (in this case, Is, for example, in the process of step S114, the special winning opening is immediately opened.), and when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, it is a control command for notifying that the big hit game state has ended. The jackpot end designation command is set to be transmitted, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7". The command set for transmission is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control processing after the special symbol process processing is completed. By repeating step S116, waiting is performed until the special winning opening is opened again.

The jackpot gaming state is realized by repeatedly executing steps S114 to S116.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit opening post processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round game to open the big winning opening has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or if the maximum winning number has not been reached, It includes processing for measuring the elapsed time after returning to the closed state. Then, when the next round game is started, for example, when the measured elapsed time becomes the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (in this case, Is, for example, in the process of step S114, the special winning opening is immediately opened.), and when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, it is a control command for notifying that the big hit game state has ended. The jackpot end designation command is set to be transmitted, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7". The command set for transmission is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control processing after the special symbol process processing is completed. By repeating step S116, waiting is performed until the special winning opening is opened again.

Incidentally, the time saving state (time saving control) is such that the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times and that the next big hitting game state is started, and is ended only when the next big hitting game state is started. You may In this case, it is not necessary to set the initial count value or the time saving counter.

Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and also the CTC (counter/timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Circuit) register setting. After that, it is determined whether or not a timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, it waits.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, a control signal to be a production control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state and the command analysis process is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed. In the effect control process processing, various effects such as an operation of displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, an operation of outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a light-emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the like. With respect to the control content of the production operation using the device, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the production control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. Following the effect control process processing, effect random number updating processing is executed, and numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 are updated by software as various random number values used for effect control.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of effect control process processing. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 15, first, the effect control CPU 120 executes a pre-reading process for setting execution of pre-reading effects such as holding/active change effects and movable object effects (step S160).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the prefetching process executed in step S160 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, first, the effect control CPU 120 causes the start winning prize designation command (the first starting winning prize designating command and the second starting winning prize designation) transmitted in the starting winning determination process of FIG. 8 on the main board 11. It is determined whether or not any one of the designation command), the display result designation command (any one of the display result 1 designation command, the display result 2 designation command, and the display result 3 designation command) and the variation category command are input ( Step S600). The effect control CPU 120 can recognize the start winning combination by the start winning opening designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether the winning determination result corresponding to the start winning is a big hit or a loss by the display result designation command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize the variable pattern of variable display (whether or not it is super reach, etc.) corresponding to the start winning by the variation category command. It should be noted that these commands may be stored in the start prize winning command buffer provided in the RAM 122.

When the start winning opening designation command, the display result designation command, and the variation category command have not been input (step S600; No), the prefetching process ends. On the other hand, when the start winning opening designation command, the display result designation command, and the variation category command are input (step S600; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the reserved storage number count value indicating the special figure reserved storage count to 1 It is increased (step S601). The reserved storage number count value is provided in the RAM 122, for example. The number of stored memories is incremented by 1 each time the first start winning opening designation command or the second starting winning opening designation command is input, and the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is input. It decreases by 1 each time. As a result, the reserved memory count value indicates the current number of special figure reserved memories.

After the hold storage count value is incremented by 1 (step S601), the effect control CPU 120 performs the prefetching effect execution setting process for setting the execution of the prefetching effect such as the hold/active change effect and the movable body effect (step S602).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the prefetch effect execution setting process executed in step S602 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect such as a hold/active change effect and a movable body effect (step S700). Specifically, in the process of step S700, whether or not to execute the prefetching effect is determined by referring to the prefetching effect execution determination table shown in FIG. In the case of missing or inconsistent commands at the time of winning the start prize, the pre-reading effect is not set until the variable display of the hold information corresponding to those commands is executed (digested). To be done. Further, in the case of limiting the execution of the pre-reading effect, the pre-reading effect of all aspects may not be executed for the pre-reading effect targeted for the variable display corresponding to the start winning that has occurred within the predetermined period. It is also possible not to execute the prefetching effect in some aspects. In addition, in this embodiment, when the prefetching effect is already being executed, it is restricted so that the process of executing the prefetching effect for another target is not performed until the variable display as the notice target ends. .. Furthermore, during the time saving control, the process of executing the prefetching effect may be restricted (the prefetching effect may be executed only in the normal state where the time saving control is not performed), and the time saving During the control, the pre-reading effect is executed based on the second start winning opening designation command (the pre-reading effect for the winning at the first starting winning opening is limited), and the first starting is performed in the normal state where the time saving control is not performed. The look-ahead effect may be executed based on the winning a prize designation command (the look-ahead effect for the winning on the second start winning a prize is limited). In addition, the execution of the prefetching effect may be restricted according to the number of reserved memories, for example, the prefetching effect can be executed only when the number of reserved memories is two or more. Further, when the prefetch effect is executed when the number of held memories is 1, a change that makes the hold display of the notice target recognizable (change to a special display mode that is displayed only when the hold/active change effect is performed) Each change such as a change in the display mode of the active display is instantaneously made for the player. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is 1, the prefetching effect may be executed only when the display mode with the highest expectation, such as the final color is “red”. According to this, the player's attention can be focused on the hold display and the active display.

In addition, by checking the variation category commands stored up to the previous time stored in the received command buffer at the time of winning a prize, it is determined whether or not the variation category can execute the prefetch effect, and it is determined that the variation category is an executable category. The pre-reading effect may be executable only in the case (if it is not possible, the pre-reading effect may be limited). For example, all the variation categories specified by the variation category command received one command before the latest variation category command and stored in the start winning award reception command buffer are read, and all read are "non-reach". When the variation category corresponding to the variable display mode is designated, it may be determined as the variation category in which the prefetching effect can be executed. According to this, in each variable display until the variable display which is the subject of advance notice is started, the prefetching effect can be executed when all the variable display modes of "non-reach" are set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reach effect from being executed in the middle of the prefetching effect and impairing the continuity of the prefetching effect.

FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the prefetch effect execution determination table. In the prefetch effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18, when both the hold/active change effect and the movable body effect are executed, when only the hold/active change effect is executed and the movable object effect is not executed, the hold/active change effect and When only the movable body effect is executed without executing the movable body effect (when the prefetching effect is executed as described above), when both the holding/active change effect and the movable body effect are not executed (when the prefetching effect is not executed) On the other hand, different determination ratios are set depending on whether the winning determination result indicated by the display result designation command determined to be input in step S600 of FIG. 16 is a big hit or a loss. As shown in the figure, the execution rate of the prefetching effect differs depending on the corresponding winning determination result of the winning, and the proportion of the prefetching effect executed in the case of a big hit is higher than that in the case of losing. Further, even when the pre-reading effect is executed, in the case of a big hit, the ratio of executing both the hold/active change effect and the movable body effect is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that both the hold/active change effect and the movable object effect are performed. The prefetching effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18 is stored in the RAM 122, for example. The effect control CPU 120 executes both the hold/active change effect and the movable object effect based on the look-ahead effect execution determination table and the winning determination result indicated by the display result designation command determined to be input in step S600. Whether to execute only the hold/active change effect and not to perform the movable body effect, or to execute only the movable object effect without executing the hold/active change effect and movable object effect, the hold/active change effect and movable object effect Decide if you don't want to do both. That is, in the process of step S700 of FIG. 17, whether or not to execute the prefetching effect, whether to execute the hold/active change effect, the movable object effect, or both, when executing the prefetching effect, The kind of look-ahead production is also decided at a stretch. Separately from this, whether or not to execute the prefetching effect is first determined, and when the prefetching effect is determined to be executed thereafter, the type of the prefetching effect to be executed is further determined. You may

Returning to FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the determination in step S700 determines to execute the hold/active change effect (step S701). When it is determined that the hold/active change effect is not executed (step S701; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the prefetch effect execution setting process.

When it is determined to execute the hold/active change effect (step S701; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the final color determination table shown in FIG. 19 to finally change the color (final color). Is determined (step S706). As described above, in this embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, in the pending change effect, the notice target is limited to being recognizable to the player (changed to the special display mode), and the active change effect is first started. Although an example in which the display color changes is shown, for example, the display color may be changed stepwise in the pending change effect. Specifically, a plurality of hold/active change effect patterns may be prepared so that the display color can be changed each time the hold display is shifted. In the hold/active change effect pattern, for example, according to the number of held memories, the hold order indicating the hold corresponding to the start winning is the third hold (hold 3), the second hold (Hold 2) The mode of the color and color change of the hold display at the first time (Hold 1) and the active display when the variable display corresponding to the start winning is being executed (when it becomes active) It suffices if the mode of color and color change is shown. In the process of step S706, the final display color including the case of changing it stepwise may be determined.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the final color determination table. In the final color determination table, the final colors of “white”, “blue”, “green”, and “red” are set to be determined at different ratios according to the variable display result. In the final color determination table according to this embodiment, when the final color is “red”, the jackpot rate is the highest, then “green” is the highest, and then “blue” and “white” are the highest jackpots. Is set low. Further, in the case of "green" and "red", the determination ratio is set so that the super reach or more is confirmed. As described above, in the hold/active change effect in which the display color changes to green or red, all hold displays and active displays that are currently displayed may be displayed in enlarged form. It means that at least the super-reach is definitely notified in the variable display corresponding to the pending display which is the notice target. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the enlarged display will be performed.

Returning to FIG. 17, after performing the process of step S706, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the final color determined in the process of step S706 is “green” or “red” (step S707). .. When the final color is neither "green" nor "red", that is, when it is "white" or "blue" (step S707; No), the effect control CPU 120 causes all of the displayed contents including the pending display of the notice target. The enlargement mode setting for enlarging and displaying the hold display and the active display of is determined to be none (step S708). As a result, in the hold/active change effect that changes to “white” or “blue”, enlarged display is not performed, and a small screen as a specific display area is not displayed in the image display device 5. After executing the process of step S708, the effect control CPU 120 ends the prefetch effect execution setting process.

On the other hand, when the final color is determined to be "green" or "red" in the process of step S707 (step S707), the effect control CPU 120 causes all the pending displays in the display including the pending display of the notice target. Then, the presence/absence of the enlargement mode setting for enlarging and displaying the active display is determined by referring to the enlargement mode setting presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. 20 (step S709).

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the enlargement mode setting presence/absence determination table. In the enlargement mode setting presence/absence determination table shown in FIG. 20, for the presence of the enlargement mode setting for performing the enlarged display and the absence of the enlargement mode setting for not performing the enlarged display, the display result designation command determined to be input in step S600 of FIG. Different determination rates are set depending on whether the winning determination result is a big hit or a loss. As shown in the figure, the proportion determined to have the enlargement mode setting for performing enlarged display differs depending on the corresponding winning determination result at the time of winning, and in the case of a big hit, it is determined to have the enlargement mode setting as compared to the case of losing. The percentage is high. Therefore, the player's expectation for the enlarged display can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 17, after executing the process of step S709, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that there is an enlargement mode setting in step S709 (step S710). When it is determined that the enlargement mode is not set (step S710; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the prefetch effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is an enlargement mode setting (step S710; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined in step S700 to perform the movable body effect, that is, the hold/active change effect and the movable effect. It is determined whether it is determined to perform both body effects (step S711). When the movable body effect is not performed, that is, when only the hold/active change effect is performed (step S711; No), the effect control CPU 120 turns on the enlargement flag indicating that only the hold/active change effect for performing the enlarged display is executed. (Step S712). The enlargement flag may be provided in the RAM 122. After executing the process of step S712, the effect control CPU 120 ends the prefetch effect execution setting process.

On the other hand, when it is determined to perform the movable body effect, that is, when both the hold/active change effect and the movable object effect for performing the enlarged display are performed (step S711; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 suspends the enlarged display. The active change effect is executed, and further the movable object effect is performed, that is, the overlap flag indicating that the executed movable object effect is the movable object special effect is set to the ON state (step S713). The duplication flag may be provided in the RAM 122. After executing the process of step S713, the CPU 120 for effect control ends the prefetching effect execution setting process. It should be noted that the specific condition is satisfied when the overlap flag is set to the ON state, that is, both the hold/active change effect for performing the enlarged display and the movable object effect are performed.

Returning to FIG. 16, after performing the process of step S602, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of adding a hold display or an active display (step S603). For example, when the number of reserved memories is 1 and the special figure game start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to add an active display to the active display area 5HA, and otherwise. The effect control CPU 120 performs control to add a hold display according to the hold order to the start winning prize memory display area 5H. As described above, the conditions for starting the special figure game are the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure and the first starting condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure. There are 2 starting conditions. For example, when the previous special drawing game or the jackpot gaming state has ended and variable display is not being executed on the image display device 5 and a demo image or the like is displayed, the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. It becomes a state.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the contents of the hold display and the active display (gray display as the initial state) to be displayed by the image display device 5, and displays the content on the display control unit 123 according to the determination. Output control command. The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, generates image data, and activates the active display area 5HA. The active display is displayed on the display, and the hold display is displayed on the starting winning prize memory display area 5H. After performing the process of step S603, the effect control CPU 120 ends the prefetching process.

Returning to FIG. 15 again, description will be made. After the prefetching process in step S160, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the value of the effect process flag (initially "0") provided in a predetermined area (for example, effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122. One of the processes of steps S170 to S177 is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0". This variable display start waiting process, based on whether or not the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command from the main board 11 is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 is performed. It includes processing for determining whether or not to start. When the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is received and it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1". To be done.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol being started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. Variable display, the look-ahead effect set in the process of step S602 of FIG. 16, and other various effect operations, in order to perform various effect operations, a fixed decorative pattern and various kinds of special patterns in accordance with the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of the display result. It includes a process for determining a performance control pattern. The variable display start setting process ends after the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect control determined in step S171 corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control timer setting unit). Various control data are read from the pattern, and various effect control is performed while the decorative pattern is variably displayed.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In this special figure winning wait process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When a hit start designation command is received, the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state, and the big hit type specified by the display result designation command received before that is "probability change". Or, if it is "non-probable change", the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command (when the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed), it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value.

The special winning opening normal opening process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this special winning opening normal opening process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot gaming state of “probability change” or “non-probability change”, and the effect image based on the setting content. Is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, voices and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by output of a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and a command (electric power is sent to the lamp control board 14). Various effect control in the "probable change" or "non-probable change" jackpot gaming state, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output of a decoration signal (for example, occurrence of a jackpot, , Including the effect control of notifying in the image display device 5.). In the special winning opening normal opening process, the value of the effect control process flag is set to "5" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to the reception of the big hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example. Update.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and causes an effect image based on the setting contents to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. , Outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 for the game effect lamp 9 or for decoration Various effect control at the end of the big hit game state such as turning on/off/blinking the LED is executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 15 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special figure display result is “miss” based on, for example, a display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11. The determination is made (step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “missing” (step S521; Yes), for example, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 11 indicates the variable display mode of the decorative pattern. It is determined whether or not the non-reach variation pattern corresponds to the case of "non-reach" which is not the reach mode (step S522).

When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the fixed decorative symbols which are the final stop symbols forming the non-reach combination ( Step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, the effect control CPU 120 updates the left finalized symbol determined by the effect random counter or the like provided in the random number circuit 124 or the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control counter setting unit). By extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for use and referring to the left definite symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, the "left" of the definite decorative symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 can be selected. The left fixed decorative design which is stopped and displayed in the decorative design display area 5L is determined. Next, the numerical data showing the random number value for determining the right fixed symbol which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the right fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, the right fixed decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative pattern display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative patterns. At this time, it may be determined such that the symbol number of the right confirmed decorative design is different from the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative design by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium fixed symbol determination that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, among the fixed decorative patterns, the medium fixed decorative pattern which is stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols which is the final stop symbol forming the reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the processing of step S524, first, the numerical data showing the random value for determining the left and right fixed symbols updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and left and right stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to the fixed symbol determination table, etc., the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decorative symbols are displayed. Determine the same decorative pattern. Furthermore, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. Thus, the final fixed decorative design is determined to be stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative design display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 of the final decorative design. Here, when the fixed decorative design is a big hit combination, for example, when the design number of the medium fixed decorative design is the same as the design number of the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design, an arbitrary value is set. (For example, "1") may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative design so that the fixed decorative design does not become a big hit combination but becomes a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium fixed decorative design, a difference (design difference) between the left fixed decorative design and the right fixed decorative design is determined, and the medium fixed decorative design corresponding to the determined difference may be set. ..

When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not "miss" (step S521; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the fixed decorative symbols which are the final stop symbols forming the jackpot combination. (Step S527). As an example, in the process of step S527, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like, is extracted. Next, by referring to the jackpot determination symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and the like, the decorative symbol display areas 5L of "left", "middle" and "right" in the display area of the image display device 5, The decorative symbols having the same symbol numbers stopped and displayed in 5C and 5R are determined. At this time, for example, the same decorative pattern is determined according to the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command or the like.

The information of the left confirmed decorative design, the right confirmed decorative design, the middle confirmed decorative design, and the stop order information set in steps S523, S524, and S527 are stored in, for example, the RAM 122.

After performing any of the processes of steps S523, S524, and S527, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the duplication flag is set to the ON state (step S528). As described above, the overlap flag is a flag indicating that the hold/active change effect for performing the enlarged display is executed and the movable object effect is further performed, and is set to the ON state in the process of step S712 in FIG. .. When it is determined that the duplication flag is set to the ON state (step S528; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect on the small screen as the specific display area displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable object effect. Movable body special effect setting processing for performing settings for executing the movable body special effect for displaying an image is executed (step S529). Specifically, in the process of step S529, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of each variable display in a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the reservation target reservation is performed, and the rotation operation is performed. At the same time, the setting for displaying the effect image on the small screen as the specific display area is performed. After executing the process of step S529, the effect control CPU 120 performs the hold/active change effect execution setting process for setting the hold/active change effect (step S530). In the process of step S530, setting is performed to enlarge and display all the pending displays and active displays including the pending display of the preview target, and the effect production is performed at the timing when the pending display of the preview target is first shifted, Furthermore, the display color of the active display is set to be changed by performing the effect at the timing of shifting to the active display area 5HA. In the process of step S530, a small screen as a specific display area is displayed on the image display device 5, and an image displayed in the hold/active change effect (for example, hold display, active display, character image in action effect, etc.) is displayed. The display other than) is set on the small screen, and after the hold/active change effect is finished, the display on the small screen as the specific display area is finished and the original setting is set. The process of step S529 may be executed after the process of step S530.

When it is determined in step S528 that the overlap flag is in the off state (step S528; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the movable object effect (step S531). When executing the movable body effect (step S531; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs a movable body effect setting process for executing the movable body effect (step S532). Specifically, in the process of step S532, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of each variable display in the multiple variable display until the variable display of the reservation target reservation is performed, and the rotation operation is performed. At the same time, the setting for displaying the effect image near the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 is performed.

After performing the process of step S532 or when determining in step S531 that the movable body effect is not to be executed (step S531; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the hold/active change effect. Yes (step S533). When it is determined to execute the hold/active change effect (step S533; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the hold/active change effect execution setting for executing the hold/active change effect according to the setting status of the enlargement flag. Processing is performed (step S534). As described above, the enlargement flag is set to the on state in step S712 of FIG. In the process of step S534, if the enlargement flag is set to the ON state, the setting is made to enlarge and display all the pending displays and the active displays including the pending display of the notice target, and also the notice target. The effect is produced at the timing when the hold display is first shifted, and further, the setting is made to change the display color of the active display at the timing when it is shifted to the active display area 5HA. On the other hand, when the enlargement flag is not set to the ON state and is in the OFF state, the setting and the action effect for enlarging all the hold displays and the active displays including the hold display of the notice target are not performed. , The display mode is changed so that the notice display object can be recognized at the timing when the notice display target shifts first, and further, the display color of the active display is changed at the timing when it is shifted to the active display area 5HA. Only change the settings (without directing).

After performing the process of step S530 or step S534, or when it is determined in step S533 that the hold/active change effect is not executed (step S533; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the other effect. The effect pattern setting process is performed (step S535).

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120, based on the contents set in the process of step S528 to step S534 and the effect pattern set in the process of step S529, the effect control pattern to be the usage pattern to be used thereafter, A selection is made from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S536).

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (the effect control timer setting unit or the like) of the RAM 122 in correspondence with the change pattern specified by the change pattern command, for example. (Step S537).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern or the like in the image display device 5 (step S538). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S536 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the image display device 5 The variation of the decorative design may be started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in the display area.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for updating the hold display in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H and the active display in the active display area 5HA in response to the start of the variable display (step S539). Here, when the hold display is displayed in the starting winning prize memory display area 5H, the effect control CPU 120 erases the hold display corresponding to the hold order 1, and moves the remaining hold displays one by one (shift). ) Let me. On the other hand, when the hold display is not displayed in the starting prize winning memory display area 5H and only the active display in the active display area 5HA is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 does not update the display.

After that, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S540), and then ends the variable display start setting process.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of FIG. 15 as the variable display effect effect process. In the effect display during variable display shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the effect control process timer value (step S801). ). As an example, in the process of step S541, the effect control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

When the variable display time has not elapsed in step S541 (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the movable body effect execution period for executing the movable object effect ( Step S802). The movable body effect execution period is set in step S529 or step S532 shown in FIG. When it is determined that it is the movable body effect execution period (step S802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the overlap flag is set to the on state (step S803). When the duplication flag is set to the ON state (step S803; Yes), the movable body 99 is rotated, and the effect image is displayed on the small screen as the specific display area in accordance with the rotation operation. Control is performed (step S805). On the other hand, when the overlap flag is off (step S803; No), the movable body 99 is rotated, and a movable body effect control for displaying an effect image near the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 in accordance with the rotation operation. Is performed (step S804).

After performing the processing of step S805 or step S804, or when it is determined in step S802 that it is not the movable body effect execution period (step S803; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold/active change effect. It is determined whether or not it is the hold/active change effect execution period (step S806). The hold/active change effect execution period is set in step S530 or step S534 shown in FIG. When it is determined that it is during the hold/active change effect execution period (step S806; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold/active change effect according to the content set in step S530 or step S534 of FIG. Yes (step S807). Specifically, in the process of step S807, when the enlargement mode setting for performing the enlarged display is performed, the enlargement control for enlarging and displaying all the pending displays and the active displays including the pending display of the notice target is performed. In addition to performing the control, the character for performing the action effect is displayed, the display mode of the hold display and the active display is changed, and a display other than the display related to the hold/active change effect is performed on the small screen as the specific display area. Control is performed. Specifically, on the small screen as the specific display area, all the displays other than the display relating to the hold/active change effect, such as the background image, variable display, notice effect other than the hold/active change effect, are displayed. On the other hand, when the enlargement mode setting for performing the enlarged display is not performed, the enlargement control is not performed, and the control for changing the display mode of the hold display and the active display is performed without executing the action effect.

After performing the process of step S807, or when it is determined in step S806 that it is not the holding/active change effect execution period (step S806; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the overlap flag or the enlargement flag to the ON state. It is determined whether it has been done (step S808). When it is determined that the overlap flag or the enlargement flag is set to the on state (S808; Yes), it is determined whether the hold/active change effect execution period has ended (step S809). When the hold/active change effect execution period has ended (step S809; Yes), the display control by the small screen as the special area, that is, the specific display area control is ended, and the display is returned to the original state (step S810). After performing the process of step S810, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag set to the on state among the duplication flag and the enlargement flag to the off state (step S811).

After executing the process of step S811, when it is determined that both the overlap flag and the enlargement flag are off in step S808 (step S808; No), or the hold/active change effect execution period has not ended in step S809. If it is determined (step S809; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a reach effect execution period for executing the reach effect (step S812). The reach effect execution period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the predetermined reach effect. When it is the reach effect execution period in step S812 (step S812; Yes), effect operation control for executing the reach effect is performed (step S813).

When the reach effect execution period is not reached in step S812 (step S812; No) or after the process of step S813 is executed, other operations are performed based on the settings in the special figure variation effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern, for example. After performing the effect operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern (step S814), the effect processing during the variable display is ended. Note that the effect performed in step S814 is performed on the small screen when the small screen as the specific display area is displayed. Whether or not the small screen is displayed may be determined, for example, by referring to the state of the small screen displaying flag provided in the RAM 122. The small screen display flag may be set to the on state when the small screen display is performed in the process of step S807, and may be cleared to the off state in the process of step S810.

When the variable display time has elapsed in step S801 (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S815). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S815; No), the variable display effect process is ended and stands by. After the variable display time has elapsed, if the predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the symbol confirmation command, a predetermined error process is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may do it.

When the design confirmation command is received in step S815 (step S815; Yes), for example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, in the variable display of the decorative design. The control for deriving and displaying the final stop design (fixed decorative design) that is the display result is performed (step S816). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (step S817), and the value of the production process flag is updated to "3" which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process ( (Step S818), the variable display effect process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23 and FIG. 25, an effect in the case where a holding/active change effect for performing an enlarged display and a movable object effect (the movable object effect executed here is a movable object special effect) are performed. The operation will be described. FIG. 23 is a timing chart in the case where the hold/active change effect and the movable body effect are performed (more specifically, the timing in the case of performing the hold/active change effect for performing the enlarged display and the movable body special effect). Is a chart). FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of the production operation of the hold/active change effect and the movable body effect (more specifically, the effect operation in the case of performing the hold/active change effect of enlarging display and the movable object special effect. It is a figure which shows an example). In the illustrated example, the variable display for the third time is the variable display of the notice target of the look-ahead effect, the variable display of the notice target is called target variation, and the hold display of the notice target is called target hold.

First, when the first variable display is started (transition from FIG. 25(A) to FIG. 25(B)), the hold/active change effect is executed, and all the hold display and active display being displayed are enlarged. The hold display of the starting winning prize memory display area 5H and the active display area of the active display area 5HA shown in FIG. 25(A) are changed to the hold display and the active display area 5HA of the starting prize winning memory display area 5H shown in FIG. 25(B). Is enlarged and displayed on the active display of). The action effect may not be executed, and the star shape (special mode) may be changed in association with the switching of the background. In addition, the display mode of the hold display may be changed by executing an action effect in a different mode between the case shown in FIG. 25(B) and the case shown in FIG. 25(F). In the illustrated example, the entire active display area 5HA (both the active display AH and the pedestal display AHA) is enlarged and displayed. In addition, the display mode of the notice display pending display is changed to a star (special mode) so that the player can recognize which hold display is the notice display pending display (see FIG. 25(B)). Hold display HG). In accordance with this, a small screen as a specific display area is displayed (small screen 6DP shown in FIG. 25B). At the same time, as the movable body effect, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of the variable display, and the effect image (effect image 44 shown in FIG. 25B) is displayed on the small screen. Is executed (above, FIG. 25(B)). Further, the background image and the decorative pattern are reduced and displayed on the small screen (the background image 66 and the decorative patterns 5L, 5C, and 5R shown in FIG. 25A are the background image 66 and the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 25B). It is displayed reduced as 5L, 5C, and 5R). As shown in the figure, once the hold/active change effect for performing the enlarged display is executed, the small screen as the specific display area continues to be displayed at least until the hold/active change effect ends. Becomes

When the first variable display ends (FIG. 25C) and the second variable display starts, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of the variable display, and the movable body special effect is displayed. It is executed (FIG. 25(D)). When the target variation starts, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of the target variation, the movable body special effect is executed, and the action effect is performed on the active display (FIG. 25 ( F)). Subsequently, when the movable body special effect ends, the display color of the active display changes to the final color determined in step S706 of FIG. 17 as a result of the action effect (active display of the special mode shown in FIG. 25F). The form of 5HG changes to the form of active display 5HK). Note that the illustrated example shows an example in which the color changes to red (FIG. 25(G)). When the hold/active change effect ends, the enlarged display ends in accordance with the end (as shown in FIG. 25(H), the start prize memory display area 5H hold display and the active display area 5HA active display (base display). Including) is displayed in its original size). After that, the specific display area is made non-display and the control by the small screen is ended, and the original display (the decorative patterns 5L, 5C, 5R are also displayed in the original size, and the background image 66 is also displayed in the original size). (FIG. 25(H)). Then, a production operation such as a reach production is performed. As shown in FIG. 23, the hold/active change effect in this embodiment ends after the end of the movable body effect (in this case, the movable body special effect). Further, the small screen as the specific display area is erased after the hold/active change effect is completed. Therefore, the end timing of the effect becomes clear, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to reduce (prevent) a feeling of strangeness caused by the end of the movable body effect when the effect is halfway. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, in a small screen as a specific display area, a background image, a decorative variable display, an effect image, and other displays relating to hold/active change effects (for example, hold display, active display, characters in action effects). Other than the image) is displayed, and the hold display and active display are not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort caused by displaying corresponding displays corresponding to variable displays such as a hold display and an active display in a plurality of display areas.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a production operation of a movable body effect, and more specifically, a diagram showing an example of a production operation when only the movable body effect is performed as the prefetching effect. As described above, in the movable body effect, the special movable body effect of displaying the effect image for effectively highlighting the operation of the movable body 99 on the small screen as the specific display area, and the effect. Since a (normal) movable body effect of displaying an image near the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 can be executed, the difference will be described. As shown in FIG. 24(A), the third hold display is stored in the variable display (three hold displays are displayed in the starting prize winning memory display area 5H shown in FIG. 24(A), and the active display area 5HA is displayed. The active display AH and the pedestal display AHA are displayed on the display), and the case where the hold is determined as the target hold will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 24(B), when the variable display being executed is finished and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 24(C), the movable body effect is displayed for 2 seconds from the start of the variable display. As a result, the movable body 99 rotates and the effect image (effect image 44 shown in FIG. 24C) is displayed. In this case, since the enlarged display is not performed, the effect image is different from that of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 25B, FIG. 25D, and FIG. It is displayed in the vicinity (the effect image 44 is displayed in the vicinity of the movable body 99 as shown in FIG. 24(C)). Further, unlike FIG. 25(B) and the like, the background image (background image 66 shown in FIG. 24(A)) and decorative patterns (decorative patterns 5L, 5C, 5R shown in FIG. 24(A)) are displayed on the image display device 5. Displayed, not on the small screen. Then, when 2 seconds elapse from the start of the variable display, the movable body effect is finished, the rotating operation of the movable body 99 is stopped, and the effect image is erased. After that, until the variation corresponding to the target hold (target variation) is started (including the target variation), the movable body effect is executed at each variation.

Note that when the movable body effect is executed a plurality of times until the target changes, as in the movable body effect in FIGS. 24 and 25, the speed of the rotation operation at each time is gradually increased, or the color of the effect image is changed at each time. You may change it. In this case, the effect image of the final color in the hold/active change effect may be displayed in the final movable object effect. According to this, it is possible to maintain a sense of unity of production and improve the enjoyment of the game. It should be noted that the movable body 99 may also be provided with an LED or a lamp, and may be lit or blinked in various colors according to the rotating operation. For example, an LED may be provided on the movable body 99 so that the movable body 99 emits light in a color according to the degree of expectation and is rotated (that is, the movable body effect may be executed in a different mode depending on the degree of expectation). Then, the color of the effect image displayed as the effect auxiliary display may be a color corresponding to the emission color of the LED. According to this, the effect of production can be improved. In addition, the execution pattern of the production assistance display is diversified, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, in the movable body effect, an operation sound may be output in accordance with the rotating operation of the movable body 99. In this case, the speaker to be output may be changed depending on whether the moving body effect being executed is a moving body special effect that displays an effect image on a small screen as a specific display area or a normal moving body effect. Good. For example, in the normal movable body effect, the operation sound is output from the speaker 8L and the speaker 8R, while in the movable body special effect, the speaker on the side where the specific display area is displayed (in the example shown in FIG. 25, Since a small screen as a specific display area is displayed on the left side of the image display device, the operation sound may be output only from the speaker 8L). In addition, during the period when the small screen as the specific display area is displayed (that is, the period during which the hold/active change effect is executed), all audio output related to the display performed on the small screen as the specific display area is performed. You may make it output only from the speaker by which the specific display area is displayed. According to this, the effect of production can be enhanced.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute two types of effects, such as a pending/active change effect and a movable object effect, as prefetch effects. When performing both the hold/active change effect and the movable object effect, the effect image is displayed on the small screen as the specific display area displayed on the image display device 5, and the movable object is displayed in a different mode from the normal time. The production can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to a reduction in the visibility of the effect.

Moreover, when performing both the hold/active change effect and the movable body effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image on a small screen as a specific display area displayed on the image display device 5 to display the movable object effect. Informs the player that is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the movable body effect is being performed, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a hold/active change effect for performing enlarged display as the hold/active change effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode is changed as the hold/active change effect, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The effect control CPU 120 causes the movable body 99 to rotate as a movable body effect, and displays an effect image as an effect auxiliary display so that the movable body 99 can be effectively highlighted. In the case of performing only the movable body effect, the effect image is displayed in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5, whereas in the case of performing both the pending/active change effect and the movable object effect for performing the enlarged display. Displays the effect image on a small screen as a specific display area. Therefore, the production assistance display can be properly performed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control executes the hold/active change effect for performing the enlarged display, the display (background) other than the display relating to the hold/active change effect (for example, the hold display, the active display, the character image in the effect effect, etc.). Variable display of images and decorative patterns, effect images, etc.) are all performed on a small screen as a specific display area, and hold display and active display are not displayed on the small screen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort caused by displaying corresponding displays corresponding to variable displays such as a hold display and an active display in a plurality of display areas. In addition, the effect control CPU can perform all the displays other than the display related to the hold/active change effects, such as the background image, the variable display, the notice effect other than the hold/active change effects, on the small screen as the specific display area. It is possible. Therefore, the visibility of the effect can be improved, the effect of the effect can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 ends the hold/active change effect after the end of the movable object effect, and after the end of the hold/active change effect, the small screen as the specific display area is hidden and the control by the small screen ends. .. Therefore, the end timing of the effect becomes clear, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 changes the hold/active change effect to a mode in which the player can recognize which of the reservation targets of the prefetch effect is on hold. That is, the display mode is changed to a specific display mode when the hold/active change effect is performed. Therefore, the object for which the hold/active change effect is performed becomes clear, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the movable body effect according to the degree of expectation, and displays an effect image as the effect auxiliary display in the movable body effect. Then, when the hold/active change effect for performing the enlarged display is further performed (when the specific condition of performing both the hold/active change effect for performing the enlarged display and the movable body effect is satisfied), the effect image is displayed. The display can be performed at a different position as compared with the case where the hold/active change effect for performing the enlarged display is not performed (when the specific condition is not satisfied). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game enjoyment by diversifying the execution auxiliary display display patterns. More specifically, when the hold/active change effect for performing the enlarged display is performed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable object special effect as the movable object effect to display the effect image on the small screen as the specific display area. indicate. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the specific condition is satisfied, and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display area 5HA is arranged in the vicinity of the starting prize winning memory display area 5H, and the active display is displayed in the vicinity of the hold display. This allows the player to draw attention to the active display when the hold display is erased.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and one described in the above-described embodiment can solve at least one problem in the conventional technique. It may have a partial structure. Further, at least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined.

In the above-described embodiment, in the hold/active change effect for performing the enlarged display, it is possible to recognize which hold is held for the variable display to be notified by performing the effect effect (hold/active change effect is performed. An example has been shown (referred to as a special display mode that is displayed only in the case) (see FIG. 25B), but this is an example. For example, the action effect may be performed only when the display mode of the active display is changed, and the action effect may not be performed when the special display mode is set. The timing of changing to the special display mode may be the timing at which the hold/active change effect is started, or the timing at which the hold (target hold) corresponding to the variable display of the notice target shifts (how many times May be determined). Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the enlarged display may not be performed when performing the hold/active change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes to “green” or “red” has been described, When executing the hold/active change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes to "green" or "red", 100% enlarged display may be performed. Further, even when the hold/active change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes to “white” or “blue” is executed, the enlarged display may be performed. Further, in the above-described embodiment, when enlarged display is performed in the hold/active change effect, an example in which the target of the enlarged display is all the hold display and the active display itself being displayed, but in addition to this, the hold display Also, the display portion and display area of active display (for example, pedestal display or area-separated portion) may be enlarged and displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the hold/active change effect and the movable body effect are performed as the look-ahead effect, on the condition that the hold/active change effect and the movable object effect that perform the enlarged display are performed in the same period, An example of changing the execution mode of the movable body effect (performing the movable body special effect) is shown, but this is an example. The condition is not limited to the two types of effects executed as the prefetch effects being performed in the same period. For example, a notice effect for a change that is made during variable display is performed during the same period, such as a character notice, a notice using a character or telop, a background change notice that changes the background mode, or a big hit control. It suffices that two types of effects that are performed in an arbitrary state are performed in the same period, such as effects that are performed in the same period, and that when one effect is performed, it is difficult to visually recognize the other effect. For example, the type of effect may be any effect. Further, one effect may be a look-ahead effect, and the other effect may be a notice effect for the change that is performed during variable display. Further, the effects executed in the same period are not limited to two types and may be three or more types. In this case, the specific display area may be further displayed. Further, when three or more types of effects are executed in the same period, a plurality of effects may be executed on the small screen as the specific display area. Further, by displaying a pseudo consecutive chance symbol that is a pseudo consecutive chance on a small screen as a specific display area, enlargement control may be performed over a plurality of times of the variation. Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the specific display area is displayed in the image display device 5 has been shown, but in a game machine or the like provided with a sub liquid crystal in addition to the image display device 5, the specific display area is displayed. It is not necessary to do so, and the display performed on the small screen as the specific display area may be performed on the sub liquid crystal. Further, in the above-described embodiment, on the condition that the hold/active change effect and the movable object effect are performed in the same period, the execution mode of the movable object effect is changed, and the hold display and the active display are enlarged and preferentially displayed. Although the example is displayed in the above, on the contrary, the movable body effect may be prioritized. Specifically, it is possible to execute a notice effect for moving the movable body 99 to fill the screen of the image display device 5, and in that case, the hold display and the active display may be displayed on the small screen as the specific display area. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, various images displayed on the small screen have the same ratio as the image displayed on the image display device 5, that is, the screen size of the image display device 5 is 10. If the screen size of the small screen is 1, the image displayed on the small screen has an example in which the ratio is 1/10 of the size displayed on the image display device 5, but this is an example. is there. As described above, in the small screen as the specific display area, all displays other than the images displayed in the hold/active change effect, such as the hold display, the active display, and the character image in the action effect, are displayed. Of these, when performing an effect that requires a player's operation, such as a button effect, only the image (promotion display) that prompts the operation is not reduced at the same ratio as the image displayed on the image display device 5. (The small screen may be reduced to 1/10, and the button display as the promotion display may be reduced to 2/10). According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the promotion display. Further, during the display of the small screen as the specific display area, execution of effects such as button effects that require a player's operation may be prohibited. According to this, the player's attention can be focused on the pending/active change effect. The button effect executed after the hold/active change effect is finished may be executable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the hold/active change effect for performing the enlarged display is executed, the effect effect is executed and the display mode of the active display is “green” or “red” with a relatively high degree of expectation. An example of changing to the mode is shown, but this is an example. For example, the action effect for changing the active display may include a success effect and a failure effect. Specifically, when the success effect is performed, the display mode of the active display is changed from the special display mode to “green” or “red”, while when the failure effect is performed, the special display mode is performed. To the normal mode, which is "gray". Further, when the failure effect is performed, the display mode may be changed to a display mode of “white” or “blue” instead of the normal mode.

In the above-described embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, an example in which the display color changes for the first time in the active change effect is limited to making the notice target recognizable to the player (change to a special display mode) in the hold change effect. Although shown, the display color may be changed in the pending change effect. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the action effect is not performed in the hold/active change effect in which the enlarged display is not performed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by performing a hold change effect as shown in FIG. 26, the operation related to the variable display corresponding to the hold display may be announced. In the illustrated example, the case where the hold change effect as the hold/active change effect that does not perform the enlarged display is executed is shown as an example, but in the hold change effect as the hold/active change effect that performs the enlarged display, Is also applicable.

FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect operation of the hold change effect. In the pending change effect shown in the drawing, it is determined whether or not the color of the pending display of the target is changed by the color ball thrown toward one of the pending displays hitting and breaking the target pending display (that is, causing it to act). It is a production that shows. The setting here is to entertain the player with an effect of whether or not the ball will crack, assuming that the color ball always hits the target hold display. Of course, it may be set so that the thrown ball does not hit the target hold display. If the ball is brilliantly broken and the color of the hold display changes, the performance result is successful, and if the color of the hold display does not change without breaking the ball, it is a failure. When successful, the expectation that the pending display is a big hit is higher than when it fails. Changing the color of the hold display to a color with high expectation, such as a big hit, is also called "come up."

The pending change effect shown in the figure has one feature in that the speed of the color ball thrown toward one of the pending displays is decelerated on the way. In particular, the length of the deceleration period is not uniform and is determined from at least two types, and when the deceleration period is long, the production result is more likely to be successful than when the deceleration period is short. However, regardless of which deceleration period is selected, the timing at which deceleration starts after the ball is thrown is common.

On the screen of the image display device 5, various images are displayed during the variable display of the decorative design indicated by the three downward arrows. An image TH or H for displaying the generated pending storage information is displayed at the lower end portion in correspondence with the number of the pending storage information (hereinafter referred to as a pending storage image or a pending display). In these hold displays, the hold storage image may be displayed in a format in which the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number are distinguished from each other. A position display AHA (base display AHA) indicating the display position of the active display is displayed in the active display area 5HA at the lower left of the screen. The active display AH is displayed on the pedestal display AHA. When executed as a hold change effect in the hold/active change effect for performing enlarged display, the variable display of the decorative design indicated by the three downward arrows in the illustrated example is specified as described in the above embodiment. It may be performed on a small screen as a display area. In this case, the hold display and the active display shown in FIG. 26 may be enlarged and displayed (the movable body 99 is omitted in the illustrated example).

With reference to FIG. 26A, the character 930 having the color ball 931 appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The appearance timing of the character 930 can be set variously. However, it is necessary to prevent the production from being wasted by shifting the hold display during the production period from the appearance of the character 930 to the result of success/failure of the production. Therefore, the character 930 is made to appear at a stage where the remaining period of the variable display is sufficiently longer than the presentation period.

The character 930 throws the color ball 931 toward the second hold display TH from the left of the four hold displays appearing on the screen. The time from when the character 930 throws the color ball 931 to when the color ball 931 hits the hold display TH is a predetermined period. The length of the predetermined period varies depending on whether the production succeeds or fails, but may be the same. In any case, the speed of the color ball 930 changes during the predetermined period.

The color ball 931 moves at a constant speed until a fixed period elapses (until it moves a predetermined distance) after being pitched, but the speed is reduced after the fixed period elapses. That is, the deceleration period is entered. The situation is shown in FIG. Such a deceleration control effect is, for example, a slow motion reproduction effect. The deceleration period is 3 seconds or 5 seconds. However, whichever deceleration period is set, the period from the character 930 throwing the ball to the start of the deceleration period is common. After the deceleration period by such slow motion reproduction, the speed of the color ball 931 returns to the initial speed again, and the color ball 931 collides with the target hold display TH in due course. It should be noted that the effect may be ended while decelerating without returning to the initial speed, or the speed after the deceleration period may be different from the speed in the initial speed or the deceleration period.

After that, the effect pattern is that the colliding color ball 931 is broken and the paint inside covers the target pending display, and the color of the pending display is changed to a color different from the initial color, and the colliding color ball 931 is cracked. Instead, it bounces off and is divided into failure patterns in which the color of the pending display does not change. FIG. 26C shows a success pattern, and FIG. 26D shows a failure pattern. In the case of a successful pattern, the push button 31B vibrates before the color ball 931 cracks, and notifies the player of the successful pattern (button notification effect). As a result, the player's expectation can be improved. Of course, the push button 31B may or may not vibrate. Note that such advance notice may be given by voice or image instead of the push button 31B or in addition to the push button 31B. Further, the button notification effect may be determined by lottery. In such a case, it is desirable that the big hit expectation is higher when the push button 31B vibrates than when the push button 31B does not vibrate. Further, the vibration of the push button 31B may be set to have different strength. In such a case, the lottery including the strength of the push button 31B may be performed during the lottery for the button notification effect. Then, when the push button 31B vibrates strongly, the expectation of a big hit may be higher than when the push button 31B vibrates weakly.

In the success pattern, the color of the pending display changes from the original color (for example, gray) to any of a plurality of colors. For example, the color variations are white, blue, green, and red. Such a color difference represents, for example, a difference in the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the hold display will be a big hit. For example, red has the highest expectation of jackpots, followed by green and blue. Since the player can pay attention to which color the success pattern changes, it is possible to provide a more interesting game. In addition, in order to further increase the expectation for the color change, the movement of the color ball 931 may be temporarily stopped at the stage when the color ball 931 collides with the hold display or at the stage immediately before the collision.

According to the hold change effect described above, there is a period in which the speed of the color ball 931 is decelerated after the color ball 931 is released and before the color ball 931 collides with the hold display. It can enhance the feeling. In particular, the player's expectation is significantly improved as compared with an effect in which the speed of the color ball 931 is not decelerated and the held display is collided at the same speed. Further, since the deceleration period is selectively set from a plurality of deceleration periods, it is possible to provide a variety of effects while keeping the player paying attention to the deceleration period.

Further, in the above embodiment, the colors of the active display and the hold display are changed in the active change effect and the hold display change effect, but the size and shape of the active display and the hold display are changed, and the active display and the hold display are changed. The display may change in various ways. Red, green, blue, and white, which are the colors of the active display and the hold display, can be used for both the active display and the hold display, but there are colors, characters, characters, etc. that are displayed only during the active display. Alternatively, there may be a color, a character, a character, or the like that is displayed only during the hold display of the hold display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, by using the pre-reading effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18, the pre-reading effect execution ratio is made different between the case of a big hit and the case of losing, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the variation pattern corresponding to the variation category command, when the reach effect is executed by changing the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect corresponding to the start winning, when the reach effect is not executed The execution rate of the prefetch effect may be set higher than that. Further, based on the variation time indicated by the variation pattern corresponding to the variation category command, the execution ratio of the prefetching effect is changed, and when the variation time is a predetermined time or more, the prefetching effect is executed more than when it is less than the predetermined time. You may raise the ratio.

Further, in the above embodiment, the type of big hit is determined based on the value of the random number MR2 for determining the type of big hit, but the condition for determining the type of big hit is not limited to this. For example, a specific area may be provided near the special winning opening or inside the special winning opening, and the type of the big hit may be determined based on the game ball entering (passing through) the specific area. .. For example, when the probability variation big hit and the normal jackpot are provided, the probability variation big hit may be determined based on the game ball entering the specific area.

Further, in the above embodiment, it is controlled to the big hit game state based on the big hit symbol being displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, but it is controlled to the big hit game state. The embodiment to be performed is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second start winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and a big hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the game ball has entered (passed) into the specific area. You can stay in it.

In addition, in the said embodiment, although the aspect which variably displays several types of special symbols, such as a number or a symbol of 0-9, and displays a display result is shown, variably display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the special symbol to be variably displayed and the special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result may be different. In other words, the special symbols that are not included in the varying plural types of special symbols may be displayed as a variable display result, or the special symbols are not specially derived and displayed as the variable display result in the varying plural types of special symbols. May be included. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and it is possible to adopt a mode in which the variable display is executed using only one type of special symbol. As a variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (lighting/extinguishing may be alternately repeated). That is, the variable display may be repeated lighting and extinguishing. Even in this case, the one type of special symbol may be finally displayed (lit), or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be finally displayed. May be The same applies to variable display of other symbols (for example, ordinary symbols, decorative symbols, etc.).

For example, in the above description, the “ratio” is not limited to the relationship such as A:B=70%:30% or A:B=30%:70%, but is such as A:B=100%:0%. It is a concept that includes relationships (that is, a concept that includes allocation such that one is 100% and the other is 0%). Further, when the ratio of A is higher than that of B, it is a concept including cases where A is 100% and B is less than 100%, and B is 0% and A is greater than 0%. is there.

Further, for example, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of a change pattern indicating a change time and a change mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, one change at the time of starting the change. Although the example of transmitting the pattern designation command is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command such as presence/absence of pseudo-relationship and presence/absence of sliding effect before reaching reach (so-called when not reaching. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of the reach and the presence/absence of the re-lottery effect, etc. after the reach (so-called the first when the reach is not reached). You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation|variation time of (after 2 stop) and a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control board 12 side may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. In addition, the gaming control microcomputer 100 notifies the variation time by each of two commands, and the production control board 12 selects the specific variation mode executed at each timing. Good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). (In) the second command may be transmitted. It should be noted that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the variation pattern by using two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, and encloses the game medium to score points based on the occurrence of a prize. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine to be given.

Moreover, what is displayed in the variable display of the special symbol is only one type of deviating symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and the variable display is performed by repeating the display and extinction of the symbol. Good. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main side makes the prefetch judgment and transmits the command corresponding to the judgment result to the sub side. You may do so.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is set to the “probably changed state” is determined by determining the jackpot type at the start of fluctuation, but the jackpot opening is opened at the start of fluctuation. Only the pattern (aspect of round game) is determined (it may be specified by the big hit type, etc.), and based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit game state. The gaming state after the jackpot gaming state may be set to the “probably changed state”.

In addition, for example, by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by the recorded information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, a game score for use in a game is given and added. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into a gaming area by using the gaming score or the gaming score provided by the winning of the game.

Further, in the above description, a game machine that uses a game medium is taken as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes, and a game medium such as a game ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game and gives a score when the condition for giving a prize is satisfied.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being pre-installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

Also, the game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, a hardware resource on the side of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like may be directly used. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

In addition, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification and the configurations shown in the below-described embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be understood that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplifications in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and it is intended that all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that includes display means capable of performing variable display (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) and can be controlled in an advantageous state by a predetermined effect means. Suggestive effect execution means for executing a suggestive effect that suggests whether or not the advantageous state is controlled depending on the mode of the effect to be performed, and capable of executing an effect auxiliary display related to the suggestive effect on the display means. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S804 or step S805), and the suggestion effect execution means can execute the effect auxiliary display at different positions depending on whether a specific condition is satisfied. (For example, the processing of step S805 is executed when it is determined to be Yes in step S803), and a mode involving an operation (for example, a mode in which the display position is switched to the advance position or the retreat position, an expressionless expression) A specific display corresponding to a variable display (for example, an active display corresponding to a change in execution, a change not yet started) in a display mode in which eyes are opened and sweat is displayed or tears are displayed. Corresponding hold display) can be displayed, and the display mode of the specific display (for example, display color (white, blue, red). Display shape, pattern, position, range, etc.) can be changed. Specific display means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, active display is displayed by performing steps S90663B and S90667B, hold display is displayed by performing steps S903911 and S903929, and specific display is performed by performing step S904713. And a change suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a change suggestion effect (e.g., change effect (first change effect, second change effect)) that suggests a change in the display mode of the specific display. For example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, a change effect is set in step S904506, a process table corresponding to the change effect is selected in step S908004, and a step in which the change effect is executed by performing steps S908006 and S908105). The specific display means includes an operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed (for example, display position (advance position, retract position). Operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) or display direction (for example, downward direction). , Rightward), etc.), the display mode of the specific display can be changed at different ratios. (For example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904709, so that when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position, the ratio is 100%. While changing the display mode of the specific display, the display mode of the specific display is not changed when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the retracted position (0% of the specific display Changing the display mode)) A gaming machine.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the amusement of the game by diversifying the execution pattern of the effect auxiliary display. Moreover, the player can be made to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

Further, a variable display is performed as an example of the form of the gaming machine, which can prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment and prevent the player from paying attention to the operation mode of the specific display. It is a game machine capable of operating, and is accompanied by an operation (for example, a display mode in which the display position is switched to an advance position or a retreat position, a display mode in which the eyes are open and sweat is released or tears are displayed). It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, an active display corresponding to a change being executed, a hold display corresponding to a change which has not been started yet) in a switching mode), and a display mode of the specific display (for example, , Display color (white, blue, red). It may be a display shape, a pattern, a position, a range, or the like. Specific display means (for example, steps S90663B and S90667B in the effect control microcomputer 90100). To display the active display, to perform steps S903911 and S903929 to display the hold display, and to perform step S904713 to change the display mode of the specific display) and the change of the display mode of the specific display. A change suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control microcomputer 90100 in step S904506 in the effect control microcomputer 90100) that can execute a change suggestion effect (for example, change effect (first change effect, second change effect)) to be suggested is set. , A portion for executing the change effect by selecting a process table according to the change effect in step S90804 and performing steps S90806 and S908105), and the specific display means is a specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed. (For example, display position (advance position, retreat position). Operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward, right direction)) The display mode of the specific display can be changed at a ratio (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904709 to move the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect). When the display position of the specific display is changed by 100% when the display position is the position, the display mode of the specific display is changed when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the retracted position. A gaming machine that does not change (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%) is included. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other form examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. It should be noted that another example of this form may be referred to as an “embodiment”. FIG. 27 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as seen from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 902 that is openably and closably provided in the game frame. The game frame is a front frame (not shown) that is installed so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components attached to them (games to be described later). (Excluding the board 906).

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 903. Below the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving tray 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing a hit ball are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body that constitutes the game board 906 and various components attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 in which the driven game balls can flow down is formed.

An effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 907. On the display screen of the effect display device 909, there is an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 909 corresponds to a variable display device that variably displays effect symbols. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area that variably displays the effect symbols for three decorations (for effect) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 909, and the symbol is displayed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 909 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display device 908a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 909 to perform the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display device 908b, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. ..

Further, in the effect display device 909, the symbols other than the symbol which is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) are continued for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbols (for example, the symbols in the left, middle, and right are arranged in the same symbol). The combination of symbols) is stopped, oscillating, enlarged or reduced, or deformed in a state of being in agreement, or a plurality of symbols fluctuates in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are exchanged. Then, an effect performed in a state in which the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach production. Further, the reach state and the state thereof are referred to as the reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the effect display device 909 is not the big hit symbol, the result is “out”, and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909, fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d for displaying a fourth symbol next to the effect symbol and a special symbol and a normal symbol described later are provided. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second There is provided a fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (however, to be exact, the variable display of the effect symbol varies on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side. It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.), when performing the effect using the effect display device 909, for example, the effect contents including the variable display of the effect pattern disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of production modes such as productions and productions in which a movable object shields all or part of the screen. Therefore, even when looking at the display screen on the effect display device 909, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not it is currently in the variable display state. Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing a variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909, by confirming the state of the fourth symbol, is it currently in the variable display state? Whether or not it can be surely recognized. The fourth symbol is always variably displayed in a constant motion, and is not visible on the screen or shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 909c and the second special symbol for the first special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 909d for symbols may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing to turn on and off the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d in a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. .. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Note that “variable display is synchronized” means that the variable display start time and the variable display time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, a display color (a display color different from the deviating. For example, deviating) Sometimes it is displayed in blue, whereas it is displayed in red when it is a big hit.By the type of big hit (the display color may be different depending on whether it is a normal big hit or a probability big hit). When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the display color reminding the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol (display color different from the off For example, when it is out of focus, it is displayed in blue, while when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. The display color when the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d are turned off is the same as the background image when turned off, so as to prevent disappearance of the background image. It is desirable that the display color be different from the image (for example, black).

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the fourth symbol display area is provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is shown. You may make it implement|achieve the 4th symbol display area. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately turned on, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be possible to indicate whether or not the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed depending on whether it is displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are shown to correspond to the respective fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are shown. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909. Moreover, you may make it implement|achieve the 4th symbol display area common to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using a light-emitting body, such as a lamp and LED. In this case, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, For example, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display in which display and display of different display colors are repeated at regular time intervals. Also, when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and when the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol, for example, Alternatively, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing display such that lighting and extinction are repeated at different time intervals. Further, for example, when deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and when deriving and displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, it is the same big hit symbol. Alternatively, the stop symbols of different modes may be stopped and displayed.

On the lower left side of the game board 906, a first special symbol display device (first variable display portion) 908a that variably displays the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 908a is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display 908a is configured to variably display the numbers (or symbols) 0-9. On the lower right side of the game board 906, a second special symbol display (second variable display section) 908b that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display device 908b is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display device 908b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

The small display is formed in, for example, a rectangular shape. Further, in this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b, respectively, may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of 00 to 99, for example.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 908a and the second special symbol indicator 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display section). There is something to do.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where two special symbol display devices 908a and 908b are provided is shown, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display device.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition or the second starting condition that is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening). After passing 9014 (including winning), the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of pending storage is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and started based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the passage of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening and a gate, and the concept includes that the gaming ball has entered (wins) the winning opening. Is. Derivative display of the display result means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first starting winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 9013, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 in which a game ball can be won is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by a solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 9014 (it becomes easier to start winning), which is in an advantageous state for the player. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game balls are easier to win in the second starting winning opening 9014 than in the first starting winning opening 9013. Also, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning port 9014. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, it is easier to win the game ball in the first starting winning port 9013 than in the second starting winning port 9014. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win the prize, it may be possible to win the prize (that is, the game ball is hard to win).

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

When the variable winning ball device 9015 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 9015 is extremely easy to win in the second start winning port 9014. Although the first start winning opening 9013 is provided directly below the effect display device 909, the interval between the lower end of the effect displaying device 909 and the first start winning opening 9013 can be further reduced, or the first start winning opening 9013 can be obtained. The nails are densely arranged around 9013, or the nail arrangement around the first starting winning opening 9013 is difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 9013, and the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 9014 is Alternatively, the winning rate of the first start winning port 9013 may be set higher.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a variable winning ball device 9015 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 9014 is provided, but the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second winning opening 9013 are provided. A variable winning ball apparatus that opens and closes any of the starting winning openings 9014 may be provided.

On the side of the first special symbol display device 908a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first reserved memory number (reserved memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol reservation storage display 9018a composed of four displays is provided. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 9018a increases the number of the indicator which lights up whenever there is an effective starting winning a prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 908a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

On the side of the second special symbol display device 908b, a second special symbol reserved memory display device 9018b consisting of four display devices for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning port 9014, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol reservation storage display 9018b increases the number of display units to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 908b is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

In addition, in the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 909, a holding storage display unit 9018c that displays either the first holding storage number or the second holding storage number is provided. For example, the pending storage display unit 9018c displays the first pending storage number in the low base state, while displaying the second pending storage number in the high base state. The first number of reserved storages and the second number of reserved storages may be individually displayed. Further, it may be configured to provide a total reserved storage display unit that displays the total reserved storage number, which is the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of satisfied execution conditions in which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. Further, in the case of such a configuration, the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory are displayed side by side in the winning order to the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 in the combined holding storage display unit. , So that it is recognizable whether it is the first hold memory or the second hold memory (for example, the first hold memory is displayed in red and the second hold memory is displayed in blue). You may comprise.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the pending storage display unit 9018c displays the pending display for the pending storage that has not yet been changed, and the pending storage is displayed from the start to the end of the variable display for the pending storage. The hold display for storage is continuously displayed on the active display portion 9018d different from the hold storage display portion 9018c. That is, on the active display portion 9018d, an active display (variable display corresponding image) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed.

Hereinafter, the hold storage display unit 9018c, the active display unit 9018d, and the range surrounding the hold storage display unit 9018c and the active display unit 9018d may be collectively referred to as an “interface image”. This interface image is displayed regardless of whether there is a hold display or an active display, but it is erased in a specific situation (for example, during a big hit game state or during execution of a specific effect such as super reach). It is something. In addition, hereinafter, the hold display and the active display may be collectively referred to as “specific display”.

Specifically, the mole character is displayed as a pending display and an active display on the pending storage display section 9018c and the active display section 9018d. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 27, one active display and three hold displays are displayed.

In addition, "white", "blue", and "red" are provided as the display modes of the specific display, and the reliability with respect to being a big hit in the corresponding variation is different. For example, the reliability of the big hit is red>blue>white.

The display mode of the specific display can be changed by performing a predetermined change effect. As the change effect, the first change effect in which the hammer is swung down toward the target specific display and the second change effect in which the arrow flies toward the target specific display are provided. The display mode of the specific display that is hit or the specific display that the arrow hits is changed.

Further, as a display position of the specific display, an advance position that seems to be jumping out of the ground (for example, a display position of the first hold display in FIG. 27) and a retreat position that seems to be submerged in the ground (for example, FIG. 27 active display and second and third hold display display positions) are provided. The display position of each specific display is controlled so as to switch randomly. For example, the display position switching frequency (operation frequency) is determined for each variation, and the display position is switched based on the determined operation frequency.

Effect display device 909, during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a, and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b, for decoration (for production) Variable display of the effect design as the design of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 908b, a production symbol that reminds the big hit on the effect display device 909. The combination of is displayed stopped.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 90560 that controls the variable display of the special symbol transmits a variation pattern command that can specify the variation time, and the production control microcomputer 90100 receives it. The variable display of the effect design is controlled according to the variable time specified by the changed pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in principle in synchronization. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command becomes garbled, the variation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 90560 side and the variation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 90100 side There may be a gap between them. Therefore, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol may not be completely synchronized.

A movable member 9078, which is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 9086 and moves when the motor 9086 rotates, is provided on the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 909. In this embodiment, the movable member 9078 operates when the notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. It should be noted that the movable member 9078 may be operated not only in the movable object advance notice effect, but also in the pseudo-relation effect or the super reach effect, for example.

In addition, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 909, the left and right lower parts are attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 9087 and move when the motor 9087 rotates to move the blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as effect blade accessory). 9079a and 9079b are provided. The effect blade role products 9079a and 9079b operate, for example, when a notice effect (effect blade effect notice effect) is executed. Note that the effect blade role objects 9079a and 9079b may be operated, for example, not only in the effect blade effect product notice effect, but also in the pseudo-relation effect or the super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 27, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 includes an opening/closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 908a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display device 908b. When the open/close plate is controlled by the solenoid 9021 to be in an open state in a specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the special winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 9023.

The gaming area 906 is also provided with winning holes (normal winning holes) 9029, 9030, 9033, and 9039 for paying out a predetermined number of prize gaming balls that are predetermined based on winning of the gaming balls. The game balls that have won the winning openings 9029, 9030, 9033 and 9039 are detected by the winning opening switches 9029a, 9030a, 9033a and 9039a.

On the right side of the game board 906, a normal symbol display 9010 is provided. Ordinary symbol display 9010 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called ordinary symbols (for example, "○" and "x").

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display on the normal symbol display device 9010 is started. In this embodiment, the upper and lower lamps (the pattern becomes visible when turned on) are alternately turned on to perform variable display. For example, when the lower lamp is turned on at the end of variable display, it is a win. .. And when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is an advantageous state from a disadvantageous state to the player (a state where the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 9014) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display device 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol reservation storage display 9041 increases the LED to be turned on by 1. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is reduced by 1. Furthermore, compared to the normal state, the probability of being decided to be a big hit is a high probability state (compared to the normal state, the probability of being judged as a big hit as a variation display result of special symbols is increased. In the high probability state.), the probability that the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased.

Around the left and right sides of the game area 907 of the game board 906, decoration LEDs 9025 that are displayed blinking during the game are provided, and at the bottom there is an outlet 9026 into which a hit ball that has not been won is captured. Further, two speakers 9027 for producing a sound effect or a voice as a predetermined voice output are provided on the upper left and right sides outside the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

An operation button 90120 as an operation means that can be operated by the player is provided in the member forming the hit ball supply plate 903. The operation button 90120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 90120 is provided with not only a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can make a predetermined selection (for example, effect selection) by rotating the dial.

The game machine drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a ball operation handle 905, and uses a rotational force of the drive motor to shoot a game ball into a game area 907 (not shown). ) Is provided. The game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 7 through a ball hitting rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then comes down the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 1 start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 908a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 909. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first 2 start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 908b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 909. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second starting winning opening 9014. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

In this embodiment, in the case of a probability variation big hit, it is shifted to a so-called probability variation state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is easy to start winning (that is, a special symbol). The execution condition of the variable display on the display devices 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909 is easily established), and the game state is controlled to a high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 9015 being in the open state is increased, or the time when the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is longer than in the case of not being in the high base state. It will be easier to win the starting prize.

Note that the variable winning ball device 9015 does not extend the time for which it is in the open state (also referred to as the open extension state), but shifts to the normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a winning symbol is increased. Therefore, the high base state may be set. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 9015 being in the open state is increased. Therefore, if the state shifts to the normal symbol probability changing state, the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased, and it becomes a state (high base state) in which it is easy to start winning. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probability variation symbol, and the like, and it is from a disadvantageous state for the player. It changes to an advantageous state (state in which it is easy to start winning). In addition, increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

Also, by shifting to a normal symbol time saving state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the regular symbol display 9010 is shortened, the high base state may be shifted. In the normal symbol time saving state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency of the variation of the normal symbol is increased, and as a result, the frequency of winning the normal symbol is increased. Therefore, as the frequency of winning the normal symbol increases, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 9015 becomes high, and the starting winning easily occurs (high base state).

Further, in this embodiment, when shifting to the high base state, it is also shifted to a time saving state (special symbol saving time state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened. By shifting to such a time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so the frequency of the variation of the special symbol or the effect symbol is increased (in other words, the storage of the reserved memory is exhausted). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation in which an invalid start winning occurs. Therefore, an effective starting winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it becomes easier to start winning (transfer to high base state) May be. Also, by shifting to any one of the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it becomes easier to start winning (high base State). Further, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it is easy to start winning (high. It is also possible to set).

FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 9031. Note that FIG. 28 also shows the payout control board 9037, the effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 90560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing programs for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations according to the programs, and an I/O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built in the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The 1-chip microcomputer has at least the RAM 9055 in addition to the CPU 9056, and the ROM 9054 may be external or internal. The I/O port unit 9057 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 90560 further includes a random number circuit 9053 that generates a hardware random number (random number generated by a hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, a part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created in the power supply board 90910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 9055 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 9055 is backed up by power supply.

In the game control microcomputer 90560, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 9054, and hence the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other boards than the main board 9031.

The random number circuit 9053 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 9053 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start occurs at random timing. Based on that the time of winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generating function that the numerical data to be read becomes a random number value.

The random number circuit 9053 includes a selection setting function of the update range of the numerical data (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), a numerical data update rule selection setting function, and a numerical data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 9053. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 90560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 9054 (an ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 90560). The numerical data obtained by the operation is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 9053. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 9053 can be further improved.

In addition, an input driver circuit 9058 for giving the detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the starting opening switch 9013a, the count switch 9023, and the winning opening switches 9029a, 9030a, 9033a, 9039a to the game control microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031. There is. Also, the output circuit 9059 for driving the solenoid 9016 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 9015 and the solenoid 9021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 9020 forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game controlling microcomputer 90560. It is mounted on the 9031.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90560, the first special symbol display device 908a, the second special symbol display device 908b that variably displays the special symbol, the normal symbol display device 9010 that variably displays the normal symbol, the first special symbol reservation storage Display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol reservation storage display 9018b and the normal symbol reservation storage display 9041 is performed.

An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit game state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 9031.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. The effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 909 that variably displays effect symbols is performed.

Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080 controls the display of the decorative LED 9025 provided on the game board and the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 9035. The sound output from the speaker 9027 is controlled via the audio output board 9070.

FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 29, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070, only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for effect control.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control CPU 90101 and an effect control microcomputer 90100 including a RAM for storing information on effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be external. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 90100 is not backed up by power supply. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a signal from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( In response to the effect control INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 90102 and the input port 90103. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90109 to perform display control of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

In this embodiment, a VDP 90109 that cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 90100 to control the display of the effect display device 909 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90100, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 90109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909 via the frame memory.

The effect control CPU 90101 outputs to the VDP 90109 a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, people, characters, figures and symbols (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for this. The VDP 90109 reads the image data from the CGROM according to the instruction from the effect control CPU 90101. Then, the VDP 90109 executes display control based on the read image data.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90102 on the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90102 passes the signal input from the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

As a signal direction restricting means that allows the signal input from the main board 9031 to pass through the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). The unidirectional circuit 9074 is mounted. As the unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. In FIG. 29, a diode is illustrated. Further, the unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 90560). The output port 90571 is a part of the I/O port unit 9057 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 90571 (on the side of the relay substrate 9077).

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives the motor 9086 to operate the movable member 9078 via the output port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives a motor 9087 for operating the effect blade accessory 9079a, 9079b via the output port 90106.

In addition, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs a signal from the operation button 90120 through the input port 90107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 90120 by the player.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs a signal for driving an LED or a lamp to the lamp driver board 9035 via the output port 90105. Also, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the output port 90104.

In the lamp driver board 9035, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED/lamp driver 90352 via the input driver 90351. The LED/lamp driver 90352 supplies a current to a light emitting body provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 9028 based on a signal for driving the LED or the lamp. In addition, the electric current is supplied to the decorative LED 9025 and the like provided on the game board side.

In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input driver 90702. The voice synthesizing IC 90703 generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 amplifies the output level of the voice synthesis IC 90703 to a level according to the volume set in the volume 90706 and outputs the audio signal to the speaker 9027. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the variation period of the effect symbol) in time series.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) After executing a security check process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid or not, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S903). After initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter/timer) and PIO (parallel input/output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S904), the RAM can be accessed. (Step S905). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This is a mode showing an interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input through the input port (step S906). If the CPU 9056 detects ON in the confirmation, it executes a normal initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether the backup RAM area data protection process (eg, power supply stop process such as addition of parity data) has been performed when the power supply to the gaming machine was stopped. Yes (step S907). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 9056 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 9056 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S908). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power failure such as a power failure, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is restored from the stop, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 causes the game state recovery process (steps S9041 to S9043) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply was stopped. Processing). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set to the pointer (step S9041), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set to the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9042). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. Initialized data is set in the backup setting table for the areas that may be initialized in the work area. By the processes of steps S9041 and S9042, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S9043). Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden variation big hit, small hit, or off) to the effect control board 9080 (step. S9044). Then, the process proceeds to step S9014. In step S9044, the CPU 9056 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 39) when the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM. You may do so. In this case, the production control microcomputer 90100 may restart the variable display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

In this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of a variable time timer, which will be described later. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S9044, the measurement of the value of the variable time timer that has been saved is restarted, and the variable display of the special symbol is restarted and saved. When the value of the variable time timer that has been used has timed out, a symbol confirmation designation command to be described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the value of a special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process process is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the special symbol process flag that is saved.

It should be noted that the CPU 9056 may first check whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0, instead of necessarily transmitting the display result designation command when the power is restored. .. If the value of the variable time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the fluctuation, and the display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the display state designation command is not transmitted and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

Further, the CPU 9056 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that there is a power outage during fluctuation, and the display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates during a power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command has not been received, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

In this embodiment, it is checked whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is saved by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the game state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the predetermined area (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 9055. Also, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set to the pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set to the work area (step S9012).

By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a normal symbol per determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. Initially set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The value is set.

The CPU 9056 also initializes a sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 9031 is mounted) for initialization (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 90560 has executed initialization processing). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S9013). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 909 performs a screen display for informing that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, an initialization notification.

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 9053 (step S9014). The CPU 9056 performs settings for causing the random number circuit 9053 to update the value of the random R′, for example, by executing processing according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that a timer interrupt is taken periodically at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S9017) and the initial value random number updating process (step S9018) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S9016), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt permitted state is set. The setting is made (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when the big hit is not made, and a random number for determining whether or not the reach is made when the big hit is not made. The for-use random number updating process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value, the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the process to do, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputers, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol per determination random number is one round (normal symbol per determination random number If the number of steps between the minimum and maximum possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to that counter.

In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed by using effect symbols variably displayed on the effect display device 909. Further, when the display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of a sudden probability big hit, the reach is not suddenly and suddenly a sudden big hit symbol (for example, "135")). May be displayed as a stop). When the display result of the special symbol is not a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the reach effect is executed by performing a lottery for determining the variation pattern type and the variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 90100 that actually executes the reach effect control.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power interruption detection process is executed to detect whether a power interruption signal is output (whether it is in an ON state) (step S9020). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 9056 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input via the input driver circuit 9058, and the state determination thereof is performed (switch process: step S9021). ).

Next, the CPU 9056 is the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, the normal symbol display 9010, the first special symbol reserved storage display 9018a, the second special symbol reserved storage display 9018b, the normal symbol A display control process for controlling the display of the pending storage display 9041 is executed (step S9022). Regarding the first special symbol display device 908a, the second special symbol display device 908b and the normal symbol display device 9010, a drive signal is output to each display device according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S9032 and S9033. Execute control.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol per determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024 and S9025).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol process processing (step S9026). In the special symbol process process, the first special symbol display device 908a, the second special symbol display device 908b and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order are executed in accordance with the corresponding process. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S9027). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state. In the normal symbol process process of step S9027, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the gate 9032, and the variable display result is derived and displayed, or the variable display result of the normal symbol is displayed. When is hit, a process of controlling the variable winning ball device 9015 to an open state or a closed state is executed.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending a production control command to the production control microcomputer 90100 (production control command control process: step S9028).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs information output processing for outputting data such as big hit information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S9029).

The CPU 9056 also executes prize ball processing such as setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (step S9030). Specifically, in accordance with the winning detection based on that any of the first starting opening switch 9013a, the second starting opening switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 is turned on, a payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 9037. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of award balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The content is output to the output port (step S9031: output process).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S9032).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S9033). CPU9056, for example, until the end flag is set when the start flag for the variation of the normal symbol is set, the variation speed of the normal symbol is switched between display states (“○” and “x”) every 0.2 seconds. At such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs the drive signal in step S9022 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby executing the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be executed in.

If the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b and the effect display device 909 displaces and displays the deviation symbol, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. A predetermined combination of effect symbols that does not reach may be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "non-reach" (also referred to as "normally off") in the case where the variable display result is a deviating symbol.

If the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b and the effect display device 909 displaces and displays the deviation symbol, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after the reach state is reached, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not become the big hit symbol finally may be stopped and displayed. The variable display result of such effect symbols is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "off".

In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, in the symbol display areas 909L, 909C, and 909R of "left", "middle", and "right" on the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed together (however, in the case of sudden probability big hit). In some cases, sudden change jackpot pattern (for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed without reaching.

When "5", which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b, in the effect display device 909, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "a sudden sudden big hit". After the variable display of the effect symbol is performed as in the case of, the predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability large hit symbol. For example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the small hit symbol "5" being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 908a or the second special symbol indicator 908b is referred to as the "small hit" variable display mode. ..

Here, the small hit is a hit that is allowed up to the number of times of opening the special winning opening is smaller than that of the big hit (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 seconds is twice). When the small hit game is over, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability changing state to the normal state or from the normal state to the probability changing state. The sudden probability big hit is allowed up to a small number of times the big winning opening is opened in the big hit game state (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 seconds is twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely large. It is a short big hit, and it is a big hit that shifts the game state after the big hit game to the probability changing state (that is, by doing so, it looks to the player as if it suddenly changed to the probability changing state). Is). That is, in this embodiment, the sudden winning big hit and the small hit have the same opening pattern of the special winning opening. By controlling in such a manner, if the special winning opening is opened for 0.1 seconds twice, it is impossible to recognize whether it is a sudden change big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player. (Probably changed state) can be expected, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

When the gaming machine is configured such that all types of big hits are probability-change big hits, it is not necessary to provide a small hit. Also, when the big hit types are all probability varying big hits, if a small hit is provided, a sudden probability big hit without transitioning to a probability changing state (high probability state) and a time saving state (high base state) Is preferably provided.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbols prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 32, in this embodiment, as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”, non-reach PA1′-1 to A variation pattern of non-reach PA1'-4 is prepared. In addition, as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “reach”, normal PA2′-1 to normal PA2′-2, normal PB2′-1 to normal The variation patterns of PB2'-2, super PA3'-1 to super PA3'-2, and super PB3'-1 to super PB3'-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 32, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1′-4 that is used when the reach is not performed and is accompanied by the effect of pseudo-repeating is performed once again. Of the variation patterns used when reaching, which is accompanied by the effect of pseudo-relation, when the normal PB2′-1 is used, the variation is performed once again. Also, in the case of using the normal PB2′-2 among the variation patterns that are used when reaching and that accompany the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when the super PA3'-1 to the super PA3'-2 are used among the variation patterns that are used when reaching and the pseudo rendition is performed, the revariation is performed three times. It should be noted that the re-variation is to temporarily perform the production symbols that are once out from the start of the variable display of the production symbols until the display result is derived and displayed, and then execute the variable display of the production symbols again. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, the normal PA2′-3 to the normal PA2′-4, Normal PB2'-3 to Normal PB2'-4, Super PA3'-3 to Super PA3'-4, Super PB3'-3 to Super PB3'-4, Special PG1'-1 to Special PG1'-3, Special PG2 Variation patterns of -1' to special PG2'-2 are prepared. Note that, in FIG. 32, the variation patterns of the special PG1'-1 to the special PG1'-3 and the special PG2'-1 to the special PG2'-2 are the variation patterns used when sudden probability big hit or small hit occurs. is there. Further, as shown in FIG. 32, when the normal PB2′-3 is used among the variation patterns which are used when the sudden variation big hit or the small hit is not accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-relation, the re-variation is performed once. Further, in the case of using the normal PB2′-4 among the variation patterns used when reaching and with the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, in the case of using the super PA3'-3 to the super PA3'-4 among the fluctuation patterns used for reach and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-changing is performed three times. Further, the variation pattern of the special PG 1'-3 that is used in the case of the sudden change big hit or the small hit and is accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-repetition, is changed once again.

Note that in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, when the variation time is fixedly set according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of super reach A with pseudo-linkage, the variation time is 32). It is fixed at 0.75 seconds, and the variation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds in the case of super reach A without pseudo-linking). However, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, The varying time may be different according to the total number of pending storages. For example, even when the same type of super reach is involved, the variation time may be shortened as the number of total pending storages increases. Further, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be different depending on the first number of reserved memories. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be different according to the second number of reserved memories. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the pending storage numbers 0 to 2 and the pending storage numbers 3 and 4). A variation pattern type determination table for use in advance) may be prepared), and the determination time may be selected according to the value of the first number of pending storages or the second number of pending storages to vary the varying time.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1'(MR1'): Determine the type of big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit described later) (for big hit type determination)
(2) Random 2'(MR2'): Determines the type (type) of variation pattern (for determination of variation pattern type)
(3) Random 3'(MR3'): Determine the variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4'(MR4'): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5'(MR5'): Determine the initial value of random 4'(for determining random 4'initial value)

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined by using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2′), and then determined by using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3′). Any of the fluctuation patterns included in the fluctuation pattern type is determined. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-stage lottery process.

The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns grouped according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the type of reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B are included. It may be divided into fluctuation pattern types. In addition, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-repeating, and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that does not involve pseudo-reaction, a variation pattern type that includes one variation pattern, and It may be divided into a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of two fluctuations and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of three fluctuations again. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence/absence of effects such as pseudo-relation and sliding effects.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit, the normal CA3'-1 which is the change pattern type including the change pattern involving only the normal reach, and the normal reach and the pseudo continuous are involved. It is classified into a normal CA3'-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern and a super CA3'-3 which is a fluctuation pattern type involving super reach. Further, in the case of a sudden probability big hit, it is classified into a special CA4′-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern and a special CA4′-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern involving reach. It is divided. Further, in the case of a small hit, it is classified into a special CA4′-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern. Further, in the case of being out of alignment, a non-reach CA2′-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that does not involve reach, pseudo-relation, or slip effect, and a variation pattern that does not involve reach but that includes pseudo-relation or slip effect. The non-reach CA2'-2 that is a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern, the non-reach CA2'-3 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern of a shortened variation that does not involve a reach, a pseudo-link, or a sliding effect, and a variation that includes only a normal reach. Normal CA2'-4, which is a variation pattern type including a pattern, and normal CA2'-5, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern involving normal reach and re-variation twice pseudo-link, and normal reach and re-variation once pseudo. It is classified into a normal CA2'-6, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a series, and a super CA2'-7, which is a fluctuation pattern type with super reach.

In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 31, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a counter for generating the random number for jackpot type determination (1) and the random number for normal symbol determination (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are the determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are the display random numbers (random 2′, random 3′) or the initial value random numbers (random 5′). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the game effect. In addition, in this embodiment, a random number generated by the hardware built in the game control microcomputer 90560 (which may be hardware outside the game control microcomputer 90560) is used as the big hit determination random number. As the big hit determination random number, a software random number may be used instead of a hardware random number.

FIG. 34A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The big hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with the random R′ is set. The big hit judgment table includes a normal big hit judgment table used in a normal state (a game state that is not the probability changed state) and a probability change time big hit determination table used in the probability changed state. In the normal-time jackpot determination table, each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 34(A) is set, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 34(A). Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 34(A) is a jackpot determination value.

34B and 34C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R'is set. The small hit determination table, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, and the small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol There is (for the second special symbol). The small hitting determination table (for the first special symbol) is set to each numerical value described in FIG. 34(B), and the small hitting determination table (for the second special symbol) is shown in FIG. 34(C). Each listed numerical value is set. Also, the numerical values described in FIGS. 34B and 34C are small hit determination values.

The small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 34(C) may not be provided. In this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed when the game state is shifted to the probability change state. Even if the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, a small hit occurs, and if it is configured so as to produce an effect that fuels whether or not the probability changes, the current gaming state is the probability changing state. On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoyed. Therefore, if the small hit does not occur during the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit is less likely to occur when the gaming state is the positive changed state, and the stunning effect against the positive change is not performed more than necessary. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels troublesome.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 9053 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R′). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. When it matches any of the jackpot determination values shown, it is determined to be a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) for the special symbol. Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 34B and 34C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 34(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the “probability” shown in FIGS. 34(B) and 34(C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, determining whether to make a big hit, it is to make a decision to move to a big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to move to the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b It is also to decide whether or not to make a symbol a small hit symbol.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34B and 34C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning a prize is given to the first starting winning opening 9013 and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the starting winning a prize is given to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the variable display is executed, the percentage of the “small hit” is determined.

34D and 34E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b stored in the ROM 9054. Of these, FIG. 34(D) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 9013 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 90131a in the case. In addition, FIG. 34(E) is a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 9014 (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 90131b.

The jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is "normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 1') for jackpot type determination, It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the "probability variation jackpot" and the "probability variation jackpot". In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34D and 34E, the jackpot type determination table 90131a is assigned with eight determination values for “a sudden change in jackpot” (40 minutes). 8 is determined to be a sudden probability big jackpot), whereas the jackpot type determination table 90131b is assigned two determination values for "a sudden probability big jackpot" (ratio 2/40). Suddenly decided as a sudden change jackpot in)) Explain the case. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning a prize is given to the first starting winning opening 9013 and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the starting winning a prize is given to the second starting winning opening 9014 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the rate of being decided as “a sudden probability big hit” is high. In addition, "sudden probability big hit" is distributed only to the big hit type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol, and "sudden positive big hit" is not distributed to the big jack type determination table 90131b for the second special symbol (that is, , The first special symbol may be changed and displayed, and it may be determined as "a sudden probability big hit".

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34(D) and (E), a sudden certainty big hit (two-round big hit) as the first specific game state that gives a predetermined amount of game value, and the game. There is a case where it is determined to be a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot (15 rounds jackpot) as the second specific gaming state that gives a game value of an amount larger than the value, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Although the case of deciding to enter the first specific game state at a high rate is shown, the game value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of the game balls to the large winning hole per round is increased as the game value is determined. Good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the opening time of the special winning opening per one big hit during the big hit is extended may be determined. Further, for example, even in the case of the same 15-round big hit, the first specific game state in which the special winning opening is opened once per round, and the second specific game state in which the special winning opening is opened plural times per round It is possible to prepare and increase the game value of the second specific game state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, when the special winning opening is opened 15 times in either the first specific game state or the second specific game state (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific game state) May be finished, and in the case of the second specific game state, the undigested round will remain), and an effect may be executed in a manner that fuels whether or not the big hit continues. Then, in the case of the first specific game state, since all 15 rounds have been internally ended, the jackpot game is ended, and in the case of the second specific game state, the undigested round remains internally. Therefore, the jackpot game may be continued (an effect in which the jackpot opening is additionally started by a bonus after finishing the jackpot of 15 times opening).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34D and 34E, the types of big hits include "normal big hits", "probably odd big hits", and "suddenly sudden big hits". In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types of 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. It's not limited to For example, a 7R certainty variation jackpot for controlling a seven-round jackpot game and a 5R certainty variation jackpot for controlling a five-round jackpot game may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, there are three types of big hit types: "normal big hit", "probably odd big hit" and "suddenly sudden big hit". A jackpot type may be provided. In addition, conversely, there may be less than three types of big hits, for example, only two types of big hits may be provided.

The "normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 15 rounds and shifts to a time saving state (high base state) after the end of the big hit game state (see steps S90167 and 90168 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is completed 100 times, the time saving state ends (see steps S90168 and S90137 to 90140 described later). Note that in this embodiment, even after a big hit occurs after the shift to the time saving state and before the end of execution of the variable display 100 times, the time saving state ends (see step S90132 to be described later).

The "probable variation big hit" is a big jackpot that is controlled to a big hit game state for 15 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) after the end of the big hit game state (in the present embodiment, it is shifted to the probability variation state). The time saving state (high base state) is also entered (see steps S90169 and S90170 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132 described later).

Further, the "sudden probability big hit" is allowed up to the number of times that the special winning opening is opened less than "normal big hit" or "probable big hit" (in this embodiment, the opening is 0.1 second twice). It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden sudden change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds. In addition, in "normal big hit" and "probable odds big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in "sudden positive big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening per round It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it is hardly expected that a game ball will win the big winning opening during a big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, after the sudden probability big hit game state is suddenly changed to the probability variation state (high probability state) (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is changed to the time saving state (high base state)). (See steps S90169 and S90170 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132 described later).

As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the "small hit" occurs, the special winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the big hit game state is caused by the "sudden probability big hit". Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", the game state does not change after the opening of the special winning opening twice, and the game state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it becomes impossible to recognize whether it is a "sudden variation big hit" or a "small hit", and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

The jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b have numerical values that are compared with the value of the random 1', and the determination values (the jackpot type determination that correspond to each of the "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot". Value) is set. When the value of Random 1′ matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 9056 determines the type of the jackpot as the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

FIGS. 35(A) to 35(C) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the variation pattern type is a random number for variation pattern type determination according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table that is referenced to determine any one of a plurality of types based on (random 2').

Each of the variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C for big hits is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 2') for determining the variation pattern type, and is normal CA3'-1 to normal CA3'. -2, the super CA3'-3, the special CA4'-1, and the special CA4'-2, the determination value corresponding to any of the variation pattern types is set.

For example, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 90132A shown in FIG. 35(A) used when the jackpot type is the "normal jackpot", and FIG. 35(B) used when the jackpot type is the "probable variation jackpot". The assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3′-1 to normal CA3′-2 and super CA3′-3 is different from the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 90132B.

In this way, comparing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C selected according to the big hit type, the assignment of the determination value to each variation pattern type differs depending on the big hit type. Further, a determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type that differs depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of which of the plurality of types of big hit types, and the proportion determined for the same variation pattern type can be different.

As shown in FIGS. 35(A) and 35(B), in this embodiment, in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability variation big hit", a random number (random 2') for determining the variation pattern type is used. When the value is 150 to 251, it is understood that the variable display with at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

In addition, regarding the super reach jackpot, the variation pattern types that involve pseudo-links (variation pattern types that include the variation patterns of super PA3′-3 and super PA3′-4) and the variation pattern types that do not include pseudo-links (super PB3′− 3 and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of the super PB3'-4). In this case, in both the large hit variation pattern type determination table 90132A for the normal big hit and the large hit variation pattern type determination table 90132B for the probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type accompanied by the super reach and the pseudo continuous and the super reach and the pseudo continuous are defined. The variation pattern type that is not involved is assigned.

Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 90132C used when the jackpot type is the "abrupt probability sudden big hit", for example, the jackpot types such as the special CA4'-1 and the special CA4'-2 are other than the "abrupt probability sudden big hit". In some cases, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the determination value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "sudden probability big hit", the sudden big hit control is different from the normal big hit or the positive big hit control. It can be determined by the variation pattern type.

Further, FIG. 35D is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern type determination table 90132D for small hits. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 90132D includes a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2') for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit pattern. It is a table that is referenced to determine any of the types. Note that, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35(D), when it is decided to make a small hit, a case where special CA4'-1 is decided as the variation pattern type is shown. There is.

36(A) to (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the variation pattern type determination tables 90135A to 90135C for deviation. Of these, FIG. 36(A) shows a variation pattern type determination table 90135A for outliers used when the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. Further, FIG. 36(B) shows a variation pattern type determination table 90135B for outliers used when the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Further, FIG. 36C shows the out-of-shift variation pattern type determination table 90135C used when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern type determination tables 90135A to 90135C for deviation include a plurality of fluctuation pattern types based on a random number (random 2') for fluctuation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a deviation pattern. It is a table that is referenced to determine any of the types.

Note that the example shown in FIG. 36 shows a case where different out-of-range variation pattern type determination tables 90135B to 90135C are used depending on whether the game state is the probability variation state or the time saving state and the total number of pending storage numbers is 3 or more. However, it may be configured to use the common out-of-range variation pattern type determination table in the case of the probability change state or the time saving state and the case of the total pending storage number being 3 or more. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 36C, the common variation pattern type determination table 90135C for probability variation/time saving is used regardless of the total number of pending storage, but it is possible to use probability variation/time saving variation. As the variation pattern type determination table, a plurality of out-of-range variation pattern determination tables (tables with different determination values) according to the total number of pending storages may be used.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the stagger variation pattern type determination table 90135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more Although the case where two types of tables, that is, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 90135B, are used, the method of dividing the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, separate outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, the total pending storage number 1, and the total pending storage number 2). , The deviation variation pattern type determination tables for the total sum storage storage number 3 and the total sum storage storage number 4 may be separately used). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the total pending storage number may be used. For example, the deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage numbers 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total pending storage number, but the deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, it is possible to use a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved storage number (that is, the first reserved storage number). A deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, first reserved memory number 1, first reserved memory number 2, first reserved memory number 3, first reserved memory number 4... You may use each separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, the deviation change pattern type determination table for the first number 0 to 2 of reserved memories, the first number 3 of reserved memories, the first number 4 of reserved memories,... May be used. Even in this case, if the number of first pending storages or the number of second pending storages is large (for example, 3 or more), the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variation time may be easily selected. .. Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern involving super-reach as a specific variable display pattern.

The "particular effect mode" is a variation pattern type or variation pattern in which at least a high degree of expectation for a big hit, such as a variation pattern accompanied by super reach, is set and the player can have an expectation for a big hit. Is. Further, the "expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit" indicates an appearance rate (probability) at which the big hit appears when a variable display (for example, a variable display accompanied by super reach) is executed in the particular presentation mode. ing. For example, when the variable display with super reach is executed, the jackpot expectation is (proportion of executing the super reach when the jackpot is decided)/(when the jackpot is decided and lost) The rate at which superreach is performed in both cases) is calculated by calculating.

Each of the out-of-range variation pattern type determination tables 90135A to 90135B is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 2') for determining the variation pattern type, and the non-reach CA2'-1 to non-reach. A determination value corresponding to any of the fluctuation pattern types of CA2'-3, normal CA2'-4 to normal CA2'-6, and super CA2'-7 is set.

As shown in FIGS. 36(A) and 36(B), in this embodiment, when the game state is off and the game state is the normal state, a random number (random 2') for determining the variation pattern type is used. If the value is 230 to 251, it is understood that the variable display involving at least the super-reach (super-reach A, super-reach B) is executed regardless of the total pending storage number.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 36(A) and (B), in this embodiment, when the game state is off and the game state is the normal state, a random number (random 2') for determining the variation pattern type is used. If the value is 1 to 79, it can be seen that, regardless of the total pending storage number, the variable display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (and without the effects such as the pseudo-link and the sliding effect). With such a table configuration, in the present embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination tables 90135A and 90135B) includes at least variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). For some, regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, total reserved memory number) stored in the reserved storage means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer), A common determination value (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 36A and 36B) is assigned. Note that the "variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern" means that, as shown in this embodiment, for example, the variable display result is not accompanied by reach, and is not accompanied by effects such as pseudo-relation and sliding effect. It is a variable display pattern (variation pattern) used when a big hit does not occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35, regardless of the current game state, the case of using the common jackpot variation pattern type determination table is shown. However, is the current game state a sure change state? The big hit variation pattern type determination tables, which are separately prepared, may be used according to the normal state. Further, in this embodiment, when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the shortening variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 36B is selected to determine the variation pattern of shortening variation. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total pending storage number (the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number may be used when the variation pattern of the shortened variation can be selected according to the current game state. ), the threshold value may be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total pending storage number is 3 (or, for example, when the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number is 2), for shortening The variation pattern type for deviation is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined, and when the game state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, the total number of pending storages is 1 or 2 In the case of (or, for example, even when the number of first pending storage or the number of second pending storage is 0 or 1), the variation pattern type for shortening deviation is selected and the variation pattern of the shortening variation is selected. It may be determined in some cases.

37A and 37B are explanatory diagrams showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B stored in the ROM 9054. The hit variation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type or the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a random number (random 3') for use. Each hit variation pattern determination table 90137A to 90137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 90137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of the normal CA3′-1 to the normal CA3′-2 and the super CA3′-3, and the variation pattern is selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 90137B is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the type is either special CA4'-1 or special CA4'-2. Each hit variation pattern determination table 90137A to 90137B is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 3') for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect design. Includes data (judgment value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of "big hit".

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 37(A), as the variation pattern types, a normal CA3'-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern involving only normal reach and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern involving normal reach and pseudo-link. And the normal CA3′-2 which is a change pattern and the super CA3′-3 which is a change pattern type including a change pattern with super reach (sometimes accompanied with pseudo reach with super reach) are shown. ing. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 37(B), as the variation pattern types, a special CA4′-1 that is a variation pattern type that includes a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with reach. The case is shown in which the classification is classified as'-2'. Note that in FIG. 37(B), the variation pattern types may not be divided according to the presence or absence of reach, but may be divided according to the presence or absence of effects such as pseudo-relation and sliding effects. In this case, for example, the special CA4'-1 includes the special PG1'-1 and the special PG2'-1, which are the variation patterns that do not accompany the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect, and the special CA4'-2 includes the pseudo-reconnection and the special-relation. You may comprise so that special PG1'-2, special PG1'-3, and special PG2'-2 with a sliding effect may be included.

FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 90138A stored in the ROM 9054. The deviation variation pattern determination table 90138A is based on a random number (random 3′) for variation pattern determination in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “off”. , A table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. The deviation variation pattern determination table 90138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

39 and 40 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. In the example shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, the command 80XX(H) is an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 909 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is attached to each of the usable fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 32, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" shows that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the command 80XX(H), it controls the effect display device 909 to start variable display of effect symbols.

Commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H) are effect control commands indicating whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit type. Since the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the display result of the effect design in response to the reception of the commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H), the commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a production control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a production control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). The variable pattern command may include information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command 8F00 (H) is a production control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result is derived and displayed.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. The game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command when data is stored in the backup RAM when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and otherwise, initialization designation Send a command.

The command 9F00(H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

The commands A001 to A003 (H) are display control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start 2 designation command, or a small hit/sudden-variable big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, in the case of "normal big hit", the big hit start 1 designation command (A001(H)) is used, and in the case of "normal big hit", big hit start 2 designation command (A002(H)) is used. In the case of “sudden sudden change big hit” or “small hit”, a small hit/sudden sudden change big hit start designation command (A003 (H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 90560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designating command for sudden probability big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designating command in the case of a small hit. Good.

The command A1XX(H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) indicating a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. Note that the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted for each round with a value designating that round set in the EXT data, and therefore a different special winning opening open designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101(H)) designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Transmits a special winning opening open designation command (A10A(H)) designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the special winning opening open designation command is transmitted for each round with a value designating that round set in the EXT data, a different special winning opening open designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when finishing the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201(H)) after opening the special winning opening designating round 1 is transmitted, and when finishing the tenth round during the big hit game. Sends a special winning opening designation command (A30A(H)) designating round 10.

Command A301 (H) is a production control command (big hit end 1 designation command: ending 1 designation command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, designating the end of the big hit game. The big hit end 1 designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by "normal big hit" is ended. Command A302 (H) is a production control command (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, designating the end of the big hit game. The jackpot end 2 designation command (A302(H)) is used when the jackpot game by "probably strange jackpot" is finished. The command A303 (H) is a production control command (small hit/sudden odd change jackpot end designation command: ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability big hit game end. Incidentally, the game control microcomputer 90560 is configured so as to transmit an ending designating command for designating abrupt variation big hit end when it is a sudden variation big hit, but not to send an ending designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) that designates the background display when the game state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background specifying command) for specifying the background display when the game state is the time saving state. Command B002 (H) is a production control command (probability variation state background designation command) that designates the background display when the game state is the probability variation state.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designating command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by 1. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved storage number addition specification command) that specifies that the second reserved storage number has increased by 1. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by 1. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved storage number has decreased by 1.

In this embodiment, as the reserved storage information, for the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation) indicating that the reserved memory number has increased or decreased, respectively. Command, second reserved storage number addition designation command) is transmitted, but the form of the reserved storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and for example, the reserved storage in the following mode The information may be transmitted.

(1) As the reserved storage information, only one command is transmitted, which one of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is increased in the one command is specified, and the increased number of reserved memories is also specified. The (first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(2) As the reserved storage information, only one command is transmitted, which one of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is increased in the one command is specified, and the total number of reserved memories is set as the EXT data. May be set and transmitted.

(3) Which of the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 has the starting winning prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated as the reserved memory information. The production control command (first start winning award designating command, second start winning award designating command) is transmitted, and in addition to that, a reserved storage number designating command for designating the number of reserved storages is transmitted. The total number of pending storages may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(4) As the reserved memory information, which one of the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 has the starting winning a prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated. The production control command (first start winning award designating command, second start winning award designating command) is transmitted, and in addition to that, a reserved storage number designating command for designating the number of reserved storages is transmitted. The increased storage number (first storage number or second storage number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

The command C4XX(H) and the command C6XX(H) are effect control commands (winning time determination result designating command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a production control command (symbol design command) that indicates the result of the determination at the time of winning, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not it is a small hit, and the determination result of the type of big hit. is there. Further, the command C6XX(H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the random number for variation pattern type determination out of the determination result at winning. (Variable category command).

In this embodiment, in the prize effect processing (see FIG. 48) to be described later, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not a big hit, a small hit, and a big hit type at the time of starting winning. Then, it is determined which judgment value range the random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment falls within. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value designating a big hit or a small hit and a value designating the type of the big hit are set, and control is performed for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In addition, the EXT data of the variation category command is set to a value that specifies the range of the determination value as the determination result, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, based on the value set in the symbol designating command. Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the symbol designating command. As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit and the type of the big hit.

For example, when it is determined in the winning effect process that will be described later that the game is “off”, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is determined, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 2 designating command) in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "probable variation big hit" is determined, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 3 designating command) in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that the "sudden probability big hit", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that the "small hit", the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 5 designating command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designating command and the EXT data set in the display result designating command may be shared. With such a configuration, the data to be read can be shared when setting the symbol designating command and when setting the display result designating command.

42 and 43 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, in this embodiment, which game state, which display result the display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol becomes, and the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning. A value is set in the EXT data according to whether or not it is determined that the range of the determination value is within the range, and the variation category command is transmitted.

For example, when it is determined that the game state is in the normal state and out of the way at the time of starting winning, the CPU 9056 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 79 in step S90232 of the winning effect process described below. Determine whether or not. When the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 1 to 79, the CPU 9056 transmits a fluctuation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA2′-1 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of reserved memories. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize that the variation pattern type is at least non-reach CA2′-1 based on the receipt of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 89, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01(H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 90 to 99, the CPU 9056 transmits a fluctuation category 3 command in which “02(H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 100 to 169, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03(H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 170 to 199, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 200 to 214, the CPU 9056 transmits the variation category 6 command in which “05(H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 215 to 229, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 230 to 251, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2'-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize that the variation pattern type is at least Super CA2′-7 based on the receipt of the variation category 8 command.

Note that the thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 169, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above fluctuation categories they belong to are specifically shown in FIGS. 36(A) and 36(B). It is derived by picking up a value that can be the boundary of the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern type in the deviation variation pattern type determination table. This also applies to the following fluctuation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and is assigned to each fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 35(A) to (D) and FIG. 36(C). A threshold value used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be the boundary of the determined determination value range.

Further, for example, when it is determined that the game state is a probable variation state, a time saving state, or a deviation at the time of the start winning, the CPU 9056 first sets the value of the variation pattern type determination random number to 1 in step S90232 of the winning effect process described later. .About.219 is determined. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 219 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2′-3), the CPU 9056 sets “08 (H)” to the EXT data. The variable category 9 command is transmitted. Then, the CPU 9056 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 220 to 251 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of Super CA2′-7). The variable category 10 command is transmitted.

It should be noted that even when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2′-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the variation pattern types of the super CA 2'-7 regardless of the game state. Therefore, when executing the process of step S902232 of the effect at the time of winning described later, if it is out of alignment, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, the game state determination process in step S90226 can be omitted.

Further, for example, when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is obtained at the time of starting winning, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the fluctuation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 74 in step S90232 of the winning effect process described below. Determine whether. When the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 (that is, when it is the normal CA3′-1 fluctuation pattern type), the CPU 9056 changes the EXT data with “10 (H)” set. Send a category 21 command. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA3′-2), the CPU 9056 sets “11 (H)” to the EXT data. The changed category 22 command is transmitted. Then, the CPU 9056 sets “12 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 150 to 251 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of Super CA3′-3). The changed category 23 command is transmitted.

In addition, for example, when it is determined that the "probable variation big hit" is obtained at the time of starting winning, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 38 in step S90232 of the winning effect production process described later. Determine whether. When the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 (that is, when it is the normal CA3′-1 fluctuation pattern type), the CPU 9056 changes the EXT data to “13 (H)”. Send a category 24 command. Then, the CPU 9056 sets “14 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of normal CA3′-2). The variable category 25 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 9056 sets “15 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern type of Super CA3′-3). The changed category 26 command is transmitted.

Further, for example, when it is determined that the sudden variation big jackpot is suddenly generated at the time of starting winning, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 100 in step S90232 of the winning effect production process described later. To judge. When the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern type of the special CA4′-1), the CPU 9056 sets the EXT data to “16(H)”. Send a category 27 command. Then, the CPU 9056 sets “17 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 101 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the special CA4′-2). The changed category 28 command is transmitted.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit will be made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

It should be noted that since the total number of pending storages is not always the same when the winning determination is performed at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, the variation indicated by the winning determination result designation command It may happen that the pattern type does not match the variation pattern type actually used in the variable display. However, in this embodiment, a common determination value is assigned to at least the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2′-1, super CA2′-7, and super CA3′-3, regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore (see FIGS. 35 and 36), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a look-ahead notice effect described later is executed for the variation display determined at the time of winning when the variation pattern type is Super CA2'-7 or Super CA3'-3. Note that only when it is determined that the variation pattern types are non-reach CA2′-1, super CA2′-7, and super CA3′-3, the variation category commands (specifically, variation categories) shown in FIGS. 1 command, variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command) may be transmitted, and variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of a winning determination result of other variation pattern types. Further, if it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than the non-reach CA2'-1, super CA2'-7 and super CA3'-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified is transmitted. You may

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening 9013 occurs in the time saving state (high base state), or the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 9013 during the jackpot game. Except when it occurs (see steps S901215A and S901216A), the process of the winning determination is executed every time the start winning occurs, and the symbol designating command shown in FIG. 41 is transmitted and the variation shown in FIGS. 42 and 43. Category command is sent. Then, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the received symbol designating command or variation category command.

The effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 installed on the main board 9031. Then, according to the contents shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the display state of the image display device 909 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice output board 9070. To do.

For example, the game control microcomputer 90560, the start winning a prize, each time the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b, to specify the variation pattern of the effect symbol The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

As a method of transmitting the effect control command, the effect control command data is output to the effect control board 9080 from the main board 9031 via the relay board 9077 by one byte for each of eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) acquisition signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing acquisition of effect control command data is used. 8-bit production control command data of the production control command is output in synchronization with the production control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the effect control board 9080 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of fetching 1-byte data by the interrupt process.

In the example shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are the variable display (variation) and the second special of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a. The image display that can be used in common with the variable display (fluctuation) of the production symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display device 908b, and the image display that produces along with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the production parts such as the device 909, it is possible not to increase the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 to the production control microcomputer 90100.

44 and 45 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S9026) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display device 908a or the second special symbol display device 908b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 9056, if the first starting opening switch 9013a for detecting that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 9013 is on, that is, the start to the first starting winning opening 9013 If a winning has occurred, a first starting opening switch passage process is executed (steps S90311 and S90312). Further, the CPU 9056, if the second start opening switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 9014 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning opening 9014 has occurred. Then, the second starting opening switch passage processing is executed (steps S90313 and S90314). Then, any one of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 9013a or the second starting opening switch 9014a is not turned on, any one of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S903O to S90310 are the following processes.

Special symbol normal processing (step S90300): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 90560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of reserved storages) stored in the reserved storage buffer. The number of stored numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. When making a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S90301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game is over.

Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S90301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display until the derived display (stop display) of the display result) is the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, the control for transmitting the variation pattern command according to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed, and the variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90302.

Display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. The control for transmitting the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90303.

Special symbol fluctuation process (step S90303): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the value of the variation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the symbol. The control for transmitting the designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 90100 controls the effect display device 909 so that the fourth symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

Special symbol stop process (step S90304): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. Further, when the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300. In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting (see FIG. 56), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control process of step S9022.

Special winning opening opening preprocessing (step S90305): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while controlling to send the special winning opening opening designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to step S90306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). Note that the special winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the special winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game. In addition, the special winning opening opening specifying command is transmitted for each round with a value designating the round set in the EXT data, and thus a different special winning opening opening specifying command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101(H)) designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Transmits a special winning opening open designation command (A10A(H)) designating round 10.

Special winning opening opening process (step S90306): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the process of opening the special winning opening, a process of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special winning opening is satisfied, and if there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. In addition, while performing control to send the designation command after opening during the big hit to the production control microcomputer 90100, when all rounds have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S90307 (this In the example, update to 7).

Big hit end processing (step S90307): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended. Also, a process of setting a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability variation flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

Small hit opening pre-processing (step S90308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S90309. The small hit opening pre-processing is executed each time the big winning opening is opened during the small hit game, but when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening pre-processing is the small hit game. It is also the process to start.

Small hitting open process (step S90309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. The processing etc. which confirms establishment of the closing conditions of the special winning opening are performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied, and the number of times of opening the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S90308 (8 in this example). Update. In addition, when all opening is completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S90310.

Small hit end processing (step S90310): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control for informing the player that the small hitting game state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing in steps S90312 and S90314. Of these, FIG. 46(A) is a flowchart showing the first starting port switch passage processing of step S90312. Also, FIG. 46(B) is a flowchart showing the second starting port switch passage processing of step S90314.

First, the first starting port switch passage processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start opening switch passage process executed when the first start opening switch 9013a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, It is confirmed whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the number of 1 reserved memories is 4) (step S901121A). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S901212A), and at the same time, the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S901213A). Next, the CPU 9056 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 9053 and a counter for generating a software random number, and storing them in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer (see FIG. 47(B)) ( Step S901214A). In the process of step S901214A, a random number R'(random number for jackpot determination) that is a hardware random number, a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1') that is a software random number, a random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2'). And a variation pattern determination random number (random 3') is extracted and stored in the storage area. Random pattern determination random number (random 3') is not extracted and stored in advance in the first starting opening switch passage process (at the time of winning a prize) and stored in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of variation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3′) in a fluctuation pattern setting process described later. ..

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (reserved storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the reserved storage. As shown in FIG. 47, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, a random number R′ (a big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number and a big hit type determination random number (random 1′) that is a software random number. The random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2′) and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3′) are stored. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case where a random number value such as a big hit determination random number is stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer as pending storage is shown. However, the predetermined information stored as pending storage is Not limited to random numbers. For example, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit is determined in advance based on a big hit determination random number, and the result of the decision may be stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer as pending storage. ..

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state) is set (step S901215A). If it is set, the process directly proceeds to step S901220A. If the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S901216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is a big hit game state or a small hit game state), the CPU 9056 proceeds directly to step S901220A.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the winning display effect process is performed in which the variation display result and the variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected starting prize is subsequently executed are pre-determined at the time of starting winning (step). S901217A). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step S901218A), and also transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (step S901219A). In addition, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting the first reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901220A).

In addition, by executing the processing of steps S901218A and S901219A, in this embodiment, the CPU 9056 always designates the symbol every time the start winning a prize is given to the first starting winning opening 9013 and the winning effect processing of step S901217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S901218A to S901220A is executed, a start winning is generated in the first start winning opening 9013, and when the winning effect process of step S901217A is executed, a symbol is designated. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a first reserved storage number addition designation command are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

However, if the winning effect processing of step S901217A is not executed by determining Y in step S901215A or step S901216A, the CPU 9056 controls in step S901202A to transmit only the first reserved storage number addition designation command. The winning determination result designation command (symbol designation command, variation category command) is not controlled. In addition, when the winning effect processing of step S901217A is not executed, a winning determination result specification in which a value indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified (for example, “FF(H)”) is set as the EXT data is designated. You may make it transmit a command (designation command, variation category command).

In addition, in this embodiment, the process of step S901215A is executed, so that when there is a start winning a prize in the first start winning hole 9013, only when the game state is the low base state, the step S901217A The winning production process is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the process of step S901216A is executed, so that when there is a start winning a prize in the first start winning opening 9013, only in a case where it is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, step S901217A. The winning effect production process is executed. It should be noted that it is possible not to shift to step S901217A only in the big hit game state, and to shift to step S901217A in the small hit game state to execute the winning effect processing.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the jackpot is started. It is the state until the end of opening the special winning opening of the final round and the notification of the end of the big hit. Specifically, it is a state in which the processing from the special winning opening opening preprocessing (see step S90305) to the big hit ending processing (see step S90307) in the special symbol process processing is being executed.

Next, the second starting opening switch passage processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the second starting opening switch passing process executed when the second starting opening switch 9014a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second pending storage). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4) (step S901121B). If the second number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S901212B) and, at the same time, the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S901213B). Next, the CPU 9056 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 9053 and a counter for generating a software random number, and storing them in the storage area of the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 47(B)) ( Step S901214B). In the process of step S901214B, a random number R'(random number for jackpot determination) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1') that is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2'). And a random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3') is extracted and stored in the storage area. Random pattern determination random number (random 3') is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the second starting opening switch passing process (at the time of starting winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3′) in a fluctuation pattern setting process described later. ..

Next, the CPU 9056 executes a winning effect process (step S901217B). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control of transmitting a symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step S901218B), and also transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (step S901219B). Further, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting the second reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901220B).

In addition, by executing the processing of steps S901218B and S901219B, in this embodiment, the CPU 9056 does not fail to specify the symbol every time the winning prize is entered into the second starting winning opening 9014 and the winning effect processing of step S901217B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S901218B to S901220B is executed, a start winning to the second starting winning opening 9014 occurs, and when the winning effect process of step S901217B is executed, a symbol is designated. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a second reserved storage number addition designating command are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

It should be noted that also in the second starting opening switch passing process, the same process as in step S901215A may be performed, and in the time saving state, the winning effect effect process in step S901217B may not be performed. That is, the winning-time production process of step S901217B may be executed only in the normal state (low base state) to transmit the symbol designating command and the variation category command.

Further, also in the second starting opening switch passage processing, the same processing as in step S901216A may be performed, and the winning effect processing in step S901217B may not be performed if a jackpot game is being played. In addition, in the second starting opening switch passing process, the winning effect process of step S901217B may not be executed (that is, the winning determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). ..

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S901217A and S901217B. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 9056 first compares the big hit determination random numbers (random R′) extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B with the normal big hit determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not match (step S90220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal process, which will be described later, determines the big hit type, and the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern setting process. However, apart from that, at the timing when the game ball starts winning in the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, before the variable display based on the starting winning is started, By executing the effect processing at the time of winning, it is confirmed in advance whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type and the variation pattern type random number is. By doing so, the variable display result and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, and the look-ahead notice effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of winning, as described later. To do.

If the big hit determination random number (random R') does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step S90220), the CPU 9056 sets a positive change flag indicating that the game state is the positive change state (high probability state). It is confirmed whether it has been done (step S90221). If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 9056 compares the big hit determination random number (random R') extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B with the probability variation big hit determination value shown in the right column of FIG. 34(A), It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S90222). It is to be noted that a plurality of variable displays may be executed during the period from the confirmation of whether or not the probability change state is present in step S90221 at the time of winning the start prize until the actual start of the variable display based on the starting prize. There is. Therefore, the game state has changed during the period from the confirmation of whether or not the probability change state is present in step S90221 at the time of winning the start prize until the actual start of the variable display based on the starting prize (for example, the start of the change). If there is a sudden big hit or sudden sudden big hit before, it may change from the normal state to the sudden change state.) Therefore, the game state determined in step S90221 at the time of start winning and the game state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S9061 described later) do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a mismatch, the one that involves a change in the game state in the currently stored pending memory is specified, and the determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Good.

If the big hit determination random number (random R′) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of probability variation (N in step S902222), the CPU 9056 compares the big hit determination random number (random R′) extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B with FIG. The small hitting judgment values shown in (B) and (C) are compared with each other, and it is confirmed whether or not they match (step S90223). In this case, the CPU 9056, when there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening 9013 (when executing the winning effect processing of step S901217A), the small hit determination table (first winning combination shown in FIG. 34B). It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol). In addition, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening 9014 (when executing the winning effect effect processing of step S901217B), the small hitting determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 34C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

If the big hit determination random number (random R') does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S90223), the CPU 9056 sets the EXT data "00 (H)" indicating that the "out" is in the symbol designating command. A setting process is performed (step S90224).

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S90225). In this embodiment, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90225 whether the gaming state is the probability variation state and whether it is the time saving state (specifically, whether the probability variation flag or the time saving flag is set). To judge. It should be noted that, after confirming whether or not the state is the probable variation state and the time saving state in step S90225 at the time of starting winning, until a variation display based on the starting winning is actually started, a plurality of Variable display may be executed. Therefore, the game state changes during the period from the confirmation of whether the state is the probability variation state or the time saving state in step S90225 at the time of starting winning, until the variation display based on the starting winning actually starts. (For example, when the probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state is changed to the probability variation state.). Therefore, the game state determined in step S90225 at the time of start winning and the game state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S9061 described later) do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a mismatch, the one that involves a change in the game state in the currently stored pending memory is specified, and the determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Good.

Then, the CPU 9056 sets each threshold value for the deviation according to the determination result of step S90225 (step S90226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for performing threshold value determination is incorporated in advance, and by determining whether or not the value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination falls within the range of any determination value. Whether or not is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is determined.

For example, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90232 described later whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 219, and if the value is less than or equal to the threshold value 219 (that is, 1 to 219). Determines to set "08 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 219 (that is, if it is 220 to 251), it is determined to set “09 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42 ).

Further, for example, when the CPU 9056 determines that the game state is the normal state, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 169, 199, 214 and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90232 described later whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 79, and when it is less than or equal to the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79) Determines to set "00(H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that "01(H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). If the threshold value is less than or equal to 99 (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that "02(H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). If the threshold is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined to set “03(H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). When the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined to set “04 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42 ). If the threshold value is 214 or less (that is, 200 to 214), it is determined that "05 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, 215 to 229), it is determined to set “06 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 229 (that is, if it is 230 to 251), it is determined to set “07 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 42).

In the example of the threshold value determination shown above, since the threshold value is determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in the ascending order, the threshold value determined later is It does not fall below the threshold of the previous order. That is, when it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, the value does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is less than or equal to the threshold value in the previous order, and 80 to 89. Will be determined. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. It may be determined as 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79. This also applies to the case of performing determination using other threshold values shown below.

The threshold value in the normal state (low probability/low base state) may be always set without performing the game state determination in step S90225. Even with such a configuration, since the range of the judgment value is made common to at least the fluctuation pattern type which is "out of super reach", it is judged whether or not "out of super reach". be able to.

When the big hit determination random number (random R') matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S90223), the CPU 9056 specifies the EXT data "04 (H)" indicating that the "small hit" is the symbol. Processing for setting the command is performed (step S90227).

Next, the CPU 9056 sets a threshold for small hits (step S90228). In this embodiment, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold 251, and in step S90232 described later, it is determined that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 251 (1 to 251). , It is determined to set “18 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18(H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

When the big hit determination random number (random R′) matches the big hit determination value in step S90220 or step S90222, the CPU 9056 determines the big hit based on the big hit type determination random number (random 1′) extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B. The type is determined (step S90229). In this case, the CPU 9056, when there is a start winning into the first starting winning opening 9013 (when executing the winning effect processing of step S901217A), the jackpot type determination table (first (For special symbols) 90131a is used to determine whether the big hit type is "normal big hit", "probabilistic big hit" or "sudden positive big hit". Further, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening 9014 (when executing the winning effect process of step S901217B), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 34(E) Using 90131b, it is determined whether the type of jackpot is "normal jackpot", "probably strange jackpot" or "a sudden jackpot".

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting EXT data corresponding to the jackpot type determination result in the symbol designating command (step S90230). In this case, when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is reached, the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting the EXT data "01(H)" indicating that the "normal big hit" is set in the symbol designating command. Further, when it is determined that the "probability variation big hit" is determined, the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting the EXT data "02(H)" indicating that the "probability variation big hit" is set in the symbol designating command. Further, when it is determined that the "sudden probability big hit", the CPU 9056 performs the process of setting the EXT data "03(H)" indicating that the "sudden probability big hit" is the symbol designating command.

Then, the CPU 9056 sets each threshold for big hits in accordance with the big hit type determined in step S90229 (step S90231).

For example, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is made. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90232 described later whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 74, and when it is less than or equal to the threshold value 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Determines to set "10 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43). If the threshold is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined to set “11 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43 ). If it is not equal to or smaller than the threshold 149 (that is, 150 to 251), it is determined to set “12 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43 ).

In addition, for example, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold values 38 and 79 when it is determined that the “probable variation big hit” has occurred. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90232 described later whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 38, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Determines to set "13 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43). If the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined to set “14 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43 ). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined to set “15 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43 ).

In addition, for example, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold value 100 when it is determined that the "sudden probability big hit". In this case, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90232 described later whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 100 or less, and when the threshold is 100 or less (that is, 1 to 100). Determines to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43). If the threshold is not 100 or less (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined to set “17 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 43).

Next, the CPU 9056 uses the threshold value set in steps S90226, S90228, and S90231 and the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 2′) extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B to determine which value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number. It is determined whether or not it falls within the range of the determination value of (step S90232).

It should be noted that, in steps S90226, S90228, and S90231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, the fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 35 and 36) is set, and in step S90232, the set fluctuation pattern type is set. The determination table may be used to determine the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

Then, the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the determination result in the variable category command (step S90233). Specifically, the CPU 9056 determines whether the variation pattern type is determined in step S90232, and thus "00(H)" to "0B(H)" and "10" as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43. (H)" to "18(H)" is set in the EXT data of the variable category command.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit in the winning determination, it is shown that the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is uniformly determined. If it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is reached, the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number may not be determined. Then, it may be possible to send a symbol designating command indicating that it has been determined at the time of winning when it becomes a big hit or a small hit, and to send a variation category command that comprehensively indicates that it is a variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit. .. Then, for example, although the effect control microcomputer 90100 does not specifically indicate which variation pattern type, the variation which is comprehensively represented as one of the jackpot variation pattern types. Based on the reception of the category command, a look-ahead notice effect, which will be described later, may be executed.

49 and 50 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S90300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 9056 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S9051). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0 and the customer waiting demo designation command has not been transmitted yet, the CPU 9056 confirms whether 30 seconds have passed since the last executed variable display was finished (step S9051A). It should be noted that whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the last executed variable display was ended is determined, for example, by setting a value corresponding to 30 seconds in a predetermined timer when Y is initially determined in step S9051. It can be determined by checking whether or not the timer has timed out. If 30 seconds have elapsed, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S9051B), and ends the processing. Note that, for example, when the CPU 9056 transmits the customer waiting demo designating command in step S9051B, the CPU 9056 sets the customer waiting demo designating command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designating command has been transmitted. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after transmitting the customer wait demo designation command, the customer wait demonstration customer command is repeated based on that the customer wait demo designation command transmitted flag is set. It may be controlled not to send the demo designation command. Further, in this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag may be reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, in this embodiment, a case where the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted to start the customer waiting demonstration display 30 seconds after the last executed variable display is finished is shown. However, the customer waiting demonstration display may be started after one minute has passed.

If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step S9052). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter is 0. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 9056 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). The data indicating the "second" is set to (step S9053). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 9066 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S9054).

In this embodiment, by performing the processes of steps S9052 to S9054, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled so as to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be preferentially executed as shown in this embodiment, a big hit determination random number (random R′) in the winning effect production process shown in FIG. 48. It is possible to execute only the process of comparing the value of R with the big hit determination value in the low probability state and not to compare it with the big hit determination value in the probability variation state (high probability state) (specifically, step S90220). It is also possible to execute only the processing of step S90221 and not execute the processing of steps S90221 and S90222). With such a configuration, when the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority, between the determination result of the big hit in the winning determination and the determination result of the big hit at the time of the actual variation start. It is possible to prevent deviation.

Next, in the RAM 9055, the CPU 9056 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number =1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055 (step S9055). Specifically, the CPU 9056, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved storages = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. The data is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055.

Then, the CPU 9056 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the content of each storage area (step S9056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each reserved area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved storage buffer are shifted. To do.

That is, the CPU 9056, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages=n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved memories=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1. Further, the CPU 9056 adds up the values (the values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage areas corresponding to the total pending storage number=m (m=2 to 8) in the pending specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages=m-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective total reserved storage numbers are extracted is always the same as the order of the total reserved storage numbers=1-8.

Then, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step S9058). The CPU 9056 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 9055.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the current game state (step S9060). In this case, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the probability variation state background designation command when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set. Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the time saving state background designation command when only the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. If neither the probability variation flag nor the time saving flag is set, the CPU 9056 controls to send the normal state background designating command.

Note that, specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 9056 sets the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) according to the effect control command. Set it to a pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S9028). In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction, for each timer interrupt. The designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted in this order to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Specifically, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, first, a background designation command is transmitted, a variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, a display result designation command is transmitted after 4 ms has elapsed, and further 4 ms has elapsed. The reserved storage count subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage count subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage count subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the symbol variation designation command (first symbol variation designation command, second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

In the special symbol normal process, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the process is executed targeting the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the first special symbol indicating that the process is executed "first" Or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 9014, that is, indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processes of steps S90300 to S90310 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

Next, the CPU 9056 reads out a random R′ (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 9056 is for the big hit determination that is extracted in step S901214A of the first starting opening switch passage processing or step S901214B of the second starting opening switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. Read the random number and judge the big hit. The jackpot determination module compares the predetermined jackpot determination value or the jackpot determination value (see FIG. 34) with the jackpot determination random number, and if they match, executes a process of determining to be a jackpot or a jackpot. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is the probability variation state, the probability of being the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is the non-determination variation state (normal state). Specifically, a probability variation big hit determination table (table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 34A in ROM 9054 are set) in which a large number of big hit determination values are set in advance and a number of big hit determination values An ordinary jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 34(A) in the ROM 9054 are set) that is set smaller than the hour jackpot determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state, and when the gaming state is the probability variation state, performs the jackpot determination process using the probability variation time jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the jackpot determination table for normal time is used to perform the jackpot determination process. That is, the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a big hit when the value of the random number for big hit determination (random R′) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 34(A). When it is determined to be a big hit (step S9061), the process proceeds to step S9071. It should be noted that determining whether or not to be a big hit is to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to determine whether or not to make a stop symbol in the special symbol display device a big hit symbol But also.

The confirmation as to whether or not the current game state is the probability variation state is performed by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when shifting the game state to the probability variation state, and reset when ending the probability variation state. Specifically, it is determined to be a "probability variation jackpot" or "a sudden variation jackpot" and is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. After the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R′) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S9061), the CPU 9056 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 34B and 34C). Use to perform a small hit determination process. That is, the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a small hit when the value of the random number for random determination (random R') matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 34(B) and (C). .. In this case, the CPU 9056 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 34B. ) Is used to decide whether to make a small hit. Further, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 34(C). .. Then, when it is determined to be a small hit (step S9062), the CPU 9056 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step S9063), and proceeds to step S9075.

If the value of the random R′ does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (N in step S9062), that is, if the value is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step S9075.

In step S9071, the CPU 9056 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, as the table used to determine the jackpot type to any of the plurality of types, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected (step S9072). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 selects the jackpot type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 34(D). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 9056 selects the big hit type determination table 90131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 34(E).

Next, the CPU 9056 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select the type (“normal jackpot”, “normal jackpot”, “ "Sudden variation jackpot" or "sudden variation jackpot") is determined as the type of jackpot (step S9073). In this case, the CPU 9056 determines the jackpot type which is extracted in step S901214A of the first starting opening switch passage processing or step S901214B of the second starting opening switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. The random number for use is read and the jackpot type is determined. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 34D and 34E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the probability of sudden probability jackpot being selected is high.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 9055 (step S9074). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “sudden change big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

Next, the CPU 9056 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S9075). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is the deviating symbol is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. If the big hit flag is set, depending on the big hit type decision result, one of the big hit symbols "1", "3", "7", "9" is decided as the stop symbol of the special symbol. To do. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "a sudden change jackpot", "1" is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "normal jackpot" is determined, "3" is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. However, when the "probability variation big hit" is determined, "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, when the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, the big hit type is first determined, and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown. However, the method of determining the big symbol type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is The invention is not limited to those shown in the embodiments. For example, prepare a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol is associated with the jackpot type in advance, and first determine the stop symbol of the special symbol based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, and the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. The type may also be determined.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90301) (step S9076).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S90301) in the special symbol process process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S9091). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 uses the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C (FIG. 35(A) as a table used for determining the fluctuation pattern type as one of a plurality of kinds. )-(C)) (step S9092). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S9093). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 90132D (FIG. 35(D ) Reference) is selected (step S9094). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

If the small hit flag is also not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S9095). In this embodiment, the time saving flag is set when the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot is completed, and the time saving flag is set, and the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is also entered into the probability changing state and the saving time state. Since it is also transferred to, the time saving flag is set. Therefore, if it is determined to be Y in step S9095, in addition to the case where it is normally controlled only to the short-time state after the big hit game based on the big hit, it is controlled to the short-time state with the positive change state after the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit. There are times when it is done.

If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S9095), that is, if the game state is the normal state, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (step S9096). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S9096), the CPU 9056 determines that the fluctuation pattern type determination table 90135A for the deviation is used as a table used to determine the fluctuation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 36A) is selected (step S9097). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S9096), the CPU 9056 determines that the variation pattern type for deviation is a variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine any one of a plurality of variation pattern types. 90135B (see FIG. 36B) is selected (step S9098). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S9095), that is, when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time saving state, the CPU 9056 determines the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types. As the table to be used, the variation pattern type determination table 90135C for deviation (see FIG. 36C) is selected (step S9099). Then, the process proceeds to step S90100.

In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S9095-S9099, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the fluctuation for deviation shown in FIG. 36(B). The pattern type determination table 90135B is selected. Further, when the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state, the out-of-shift variation pattern type determination table 90135C shown in FIG. 36C is selected. In this case, the non-reach CA2′-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S90100 described below, and when the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA2′-3 is determined, the process of step S90102 is performed. In this manner, the short reach non-reach PA1'-2 is determined as the change pattern (see FIG. 38). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, or when the total number of pending storage is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation may be displayed. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state and the time saving state (see FIG. 36C) and the variation pattern type determination table for shortened variation based on the number of pending storages (see FIG. However, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

In this embodiment, even when the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state, when the total pending storage number is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1) The variable display of the shortened fluctuation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 9056 determines Y in step S9095, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the total number of pending storages is substantially 0, and if the total number of pending storages is approximately 0, the deviation variation pattern type The determination table 90135A (see FIG. 36A) may be selected.

Next, the CPU 9056 reads out random 2′ (random number for fluctuation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (first pending storage buffer or second pending storage buffer) and selects it in the processing of step S9092, S9094, S9097, S9098, or S9099. The fluctuation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the table (step S90100).

Next, the CPU 9056 is a variation pattern determination table 90137A, 90137B (see FIG. 37) as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S90100. ), any one of the deviation pattern determination tables 90138A (see FIG. 38) is selected (step S90101). In addition, the random number 3′ (random number for fluctuation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first pending storage buffer or second pending storage buffer), and the fluctuation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S90101 is referred to The pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90102). When the random number 3'(fluctuation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning, the CPU 9056 uses the variation pattern determination random number for generating the variation pattern determination random number 3'. The value may be directly extracted from the random number counter, and the variation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 9056 performs control for transmitting the effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90104).

Next, the CPU 9056 sets, in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 9055, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern (step S90105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302) (step S90106).

In addition, when it is determined to be out of alignment, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, the variation pattern type may be determined by executing the processing of steps S9095-S90100 based on the determination result of whether or not to reach. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including variation pattern types of non-reach CA2′-1 to non-reach CA2′-3 shown in FIG. 36) and a variation pattern type determination table for reach (( (Including the variation pattern types of normal CA2′-4 to normal CA2′-6 and super CA2′-7 shown in FIG. 36), and any variation pattern type determination based on the reach determination result. The table may be selected to determine the variation pattern type.

Further, also when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination, the reach of the reach is determined according to the total number of reserved memories (may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number). The reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected to determine whether or not the reach is performed so that the reach probability becomes lower as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, the CPU 9056, for example, in the determination as to whether or not "super reach loss" or "non-reach loss" in the winning effect process, matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table. By determining whether or not to reach, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, “super reach is lost” depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the reach determination random number. It is preferable to perform a pre-reading notice effect by making a pre-determination as to whether or not "out of reach" occurs.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302). In the display result designation command transmission processing, the CPU 9056 transmits one of the effect control commands (see FIG. 39) of the display result 1 designation to the display result 5 designation according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, or loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90110). If not set, the process moves to step S90116. When the jackpot flag is set and the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S90111, S90112). Whether or not the "normal big hit" can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". .. Further, when the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 3 designation command (steps S90113, S90114). Whether or not the “probable variation big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. .. Then, when it is neither "normal big hit" nor "probability variation big hit" (that is, when it is "sudden probability variation big hit"), the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 4 designation command (step S90115).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S90110), the CPU 9056 confirms whether the small hit flag is set (step S90116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S90117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90116), that is, when the flag is out of alignment, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S90118).

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S90303) (step S90119).

53 is a flowchart showing a special symbol changing process (step S90303) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S901121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S901122 described later. The storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag may be set, and in step S901121, it may be confirmed whether or not the reserved storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set. Further, in this case, the set storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set to be reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot ending processing, which will be described later, when terminating variable display of the special symbol or terminating the jackpot. Good.

Next, if the reservation storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the reservation storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901112). In this case, when the value indicating "first" is set to the special symbol pointer, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command. Further, when the value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command.

Next, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S901125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S901126), performs control to send a symbol finalization designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901127). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated as it is.

54 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S90304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 9056, if set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state, the number of times the special symbol can fluctuate in the time saving state. Is reset (step S90132), and control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed (step S90133). Specifically, when the type of big hit is "normal big hit", a big hit start 1 designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of the big hit is “probable variation big hit”, the big hit start 2 designation command (command A002(H)) is transmitted. If the type of the big hit is the sudden probability big hit, the small hit/sudden variation big hit start designation command (command A003(H)) is transmitted. Whether the type of jackpot is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot" or "sudden variation jackpot" is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 9055 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). It is judged based on.

In addition, the big hit display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the big hit display time (a time at which the effect display device 909 is notified that a big hit has occurred) (step S90134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability variation big hit", 2 times in the case of "a sudden probability variation big hit") is set in the special winning opening release counter (step S90135). .. Also, the round time per round in the big hit game is set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden probability big hit, the round time is set to 0.1 second, and in the case of a normal big hit or a probability big hit, the round time is set to 29 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special winning opening opening preprocessing (step S90305) (step S90136).

If the big hit flag is not set in step S90131, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the hour/hour count counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can fluctuate in the hour/short state is 0 (step S90137). If the value of the hour/hour counter is not 0, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the hour/hour counter by -1 (step S90138). Then, when the value of the hour/hour counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S90139), the CPU 9056 resets the hour/hour flag (step S90140).

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S90141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 sends a small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit start designation command (command A003(H)) to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (a time at which the effect display device 909 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S90143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the special winning opening opening counter (step S90144). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit start preprocessing (step S90308) (step S90145).

If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90141), the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S90146).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the big hit ending process (step S90307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit ending display timer is set (step S90160), and if the big hit ending display timer is set, moves to step S90164. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S90161), and the big hit end designation command is transmitted (step S90162). Here, in the case of "normal big hit", the big hit end 1 designation command (command A301(H)) is transmitted, and in the case of "probability variation big hit" big hit end 2 designation command (command A302(H)) ) Is transmitted, and if it is a "sudden sudden change big hit", a small hit/sudden sudden change big hit end designation command (command A303(H)) is sent. Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 909 (big hit end display time) (step S90163), and the process ends.

In step S90164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S90165). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step S90165), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be finished this time is based on the normal jackpot (step S90166). Whether or not to end the big hit game based on the normal big hit, specifically, whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". It can be determined by checking. When the big hit game based on the normal big hit is finished (Y in step S90166), the CPU 9056 sets the time saving flag and shifts the game state to the time saving state (step S90167). Further, the CPU 9056 sets a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) in the time saving number counter (step S90168).

Unless the big hit game based on the normal big hit is finished (that is, if the big hit game based on the probability change big hit or the sudden change big hit suddenly is ended), the CPU 9056 sets the probability change flag to the probability change state. At the same time as shifting (step S90169), the time saving flag is set to shift the game state to the time saving state (step S90170).

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S90171).

In addition, in this embodiment, since the processing described above is executed, when it is controlled to the probability variation state, it is also controlled to the time saving state. Therefore, as the gaming state, the normal state (low probability/low base state) ), a short-time state (low probability/high base state), and a stochastic state (high probability/high base state).

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S9032) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S903201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol changing process is being executed), the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S903202). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame/0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S9022) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, The variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 9056 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S903203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, in the case of shifting to the special symbol stop process), the CPU 9056 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal process. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S903204). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) which the special symbol pointer indicates. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S9022) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, The stop symbols of the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 908a and 908b. After the process of step S903204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the setting data is not changed, so the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S9022. Based on this, the latest stop symbol will be stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S903201 (that is, if it is either the display result designation command transmitting process or the special symbol changing process), for the special symbol changing display. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order not to cause a discrepancy between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 90560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side, variation also occurs in the display result designation command transmission process. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by 1.

In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown, but in the special symbol process process, the start flag is set at the start of variation of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S9032), the CPU 9056 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. The special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080 as effect control means. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts execution of main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of effect control is performed (step S90701). .. After that, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs effect control process processing (step S90705). In the production control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (production control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the production display device 909 is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S90706). In the fourth symbol process processing, in each process according to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected, and in the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d of the effect display device 909. Display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S90707). After that, the process moves to step S90702.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560 of the main board 9031. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command receiving buffer is composed of the 12-byte area of the receiving command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area to store the received command is used. The command reception number counter has a value of 0-11. The ring buffer format is not always required.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis processing, which command (see FIGS. 39 and 40) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

59 to 61 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S90704). The effect control command received from the main board 9031 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90101 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S90613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the variation pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616).

If the received effect control command is the display result specifying command (step S90617), the effect control CPU 90101 forms the received display result specifying command (display result 1 specifying command to display result 6 specifying command) in the RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (step S90618).

If the received production control command is the symbol confirmation designation command (step S90619), the production control CPU 90101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S90620).

If the received production control command is a big hit start designation command (commands A001 to A002 (H)) (step S90621), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step S90622). In this case, for example, when the big hit start 1 designation command is received, the big hit start 1 designation command reception flag is set, and when the big hit start 2 designation command is received, the big hit start 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

If the received production control command is a small hit/abrupt change sudden big hit start designation command (command A003(H)) (step S90623), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a small hit/abrupt change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S90624).

If the received production control command is a big hit end designation command (commands A301 to A302 (H)) (step S90625), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step S90626). In this case, for example, when the big hit end 1 designation command is received, the big hit end 1 designation command reception flag is set, and when the big hit end 2 designation command is received, the big hit end 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

If the received effect control command is a small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit end designation command (command A303(H)) (step S90627), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit end designation command reception flag. (Step S90628).

If the received production control command is any of the symbol designation commands (step S90651), the effect control CPU 90101 temporarily stores the received symbol designation command in the symbol designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90651). S90652).

If the received production control command is any variation category command (step S90653), the production control CPU 90101 temporarily stores the received variation category command in the variation category command storage area formed in the RAM (step S9063). S90654).

If the received effect control command is the first reserved storage number addition designation command (step S90655), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the first reserved storage number to be stored in the first reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S90656). Further, the effect control CPU 90101, the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received first reserved storage number addition designation command. , And stores it in the first free storage area of the first start-up winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90657).

If the received effect control command is the second reserved storage number addition designation command (step S90658), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the second reserved storage number to be stored in the second reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S90659). Further, the effect control CPU 90101, the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received second reserved storage number addition designation command. , And stores it in the first vacant first storage area of the second start prize winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90660).

FIG. 62 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning and the storage area for active display. Of these, FIG. 62(A) shows a specific example of the first start-winning command storage area, FIG. 62(B) shows a specific example of the second start-winning command storage area, and FIG. 62(C). Shows a specific example of the active display storage area. As shown in FIG. 62(A), in the first start prize-winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the first reserved memory number (4 in this example) are secured. There is. Further, in the second start prize winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the second reserved memory number (4 in this example) are secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S901218A to S901220A of the first starting opening switch passage processing and steps S901218B to S901220B of the second starting opening switch passage processing of FIG. 46, the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting. When there is a start winning to the winning opening 9014, within one timer interrupt, a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a reserved storage number addition designation command (first reserved storage number addition designation command or second reserved storage number) Three commands (addition designation command) are transmitted as a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 62, in each of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the first start prize-winning command storage area and the second start prize-winning command storage area, a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a reserved storage number addition designation A storage area is secured so that commands can be associated and stored.

In this embodiment, since the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number addition designation command within one timer interrupt, the effect control CPU 90101 designates the symbol in the command analysis process. When the command and the variation category command are received, they are temporarily stored in the symbol designating command storage area and the variation category command storage area, respectively. Then, when the command for specifying the addition of the number of reserved storages is received, if the command for specifying the addition of the number of reserved storages is received, it is known that the first reserved memory is increased by 1, and the command for the addition of the number of reserved storages If it is received, it can be seen that the second reserved memory is increased by 1. Therefore, if the first reserved memory number addition designating command is received, the temporarily stored symbol designating command and variation category command The 1 reserved memory number addition designation command is stored in the first start winning prize command storage area, and if the 2nd reserved memory number addition designation command is received, the 2nd reserved memory is also stored along with the temporarily stored symbol designating command and variable category command. The number addition designation command is stored in the command storage area for the second start winning a prize (in FIG. 62, the commands are stored in all the storage areas 1 to 4 of the command storage area for the first start winning a prize). An example is shown in which the command is stored only in the storage area 1 of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the command storage area at the time of start winning).

In addition, each command stored in the starting winning command storage area shown in FIG. 62 is sequentially executed in steps S90664 and S90668, which will be described later, at the timing of starting the variable display of the effect symbols each time the variable display of the effect symbols is started. To be deleted. In this case, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, so first, the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the second start prize-winning command storage area shown in FIG. 62(B) are deleted. .. Next, if the second reserved memory does not newly occur, only the first reserved memory is stored, so the first shown in FIG. 62(A) at the timing of starting the variable display of the effect symbols next. The contents stored in the first storage area 1 of the start prize winning command storage area are deleted, and the contents of the first start prize winning command storage area are shifted. For example, when variable display of a new effect design is started in the storage state shown in FIG. 62(A), each command stored in storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in storage area 2 is deleted. The commands are shifted to the storage area 1, the commands stored in the storage area 3 are shifted to the storage area 2, and the commands stored in the storage area 4 are shifted to the storage area 3.

In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number addition designating command that are received when the start winning is generated are also referred to as commands at the time of starting winning. In addition, among the commands at the time of winning the start prize, the reserved storage number addition designation command, which is a command for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number has increased, is comprehensively expressed. In some cases, it is also called reserved storage information. In addition, whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit determined in the prize winning effect process (see FIG. 48) at the time of starting winning, the result of determination of the type of big hit, the symbol designating command which is a command indicating the result of determination of the variation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also called a winning determination result specification command or determination result information.

In addition, the first start prize winning command storage area, the second start prize winning command storage area, and the active display storage area store information regarding the display mode of the specific display (holding display, active display). Specifically, "display mode pattern", "change timing", and "operation frequency" are stored.

The “display mode pattern” is a change pattern of the display mode of the specific display, and any of Pt1′ to Pt4′ is stored. Pt1' is a display mode pattern that does not change from white, Pt2' is a display mode pattern that changes from white to blue, and Pt3' is a display mode pattern that changes from white to blue and then to red. Yes, Pt4' is a display mode pattern that changes from white to red. The number of changes in the display mode is not limited to once or twice, and a display mode pattern in which the display mode can be changed three times or more may be provided. Further, a display mode pattern that starts from a display mode other than white (for example, a display mode pattern that starts display in blue or red) may be provided.

The “change timing” is the timing at which the display mode of the specific display changes, and is stored when the display mode is a display mode pattern (display mode pattern other than Pt1′). Specifically, "active" indicating that it is the timing displayed as the active display, "first" indicating that it is the timing displayed as the first hold display, and the second Either the "second" indicating that it is the timing displayed as the hold display or the "third" indicating that the timing is displayed as the third hold display is stored. It

"Operation frequency" is the frequency of switching the display position (advance position, retreat position) of the hold display, and either "high frequency" with high switching frequency or "low frequency" with low switching frequency. Is stored.

If the received effect control command is the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command (step S90661), the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number saving area ( Step S90662). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the high base state flag indicating the high base state is set (step S90663A), and if it is set, moves to step S90664. If not set, the first hold display and the active display are updated (step S90663B). Specifically, the active display in the active display portion 9018d is erased, and the first hold display is shifted by one (for example, the first first hold display of the hold storage display portion 9018c is shifted to the active display portion 9018d. If the second to fourth first hold displays of the hold storage display unit 9018c are lit, the first hold display displayed second is shifted to the first display area. Then, the first hold display displayed third is shifted to the second display area, and the first hold display displayed fourth is shifted to the third display area.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the active storage area (step S90663C). Specifically, the information about the display mode pattern, the change timing, and the operation frequency stored in the first storage area of the first start-up winning command storage area is stored in the active storage area.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101, the command at the time of the start winning prize stored in the first storage area of the command storage area at the time of the first starting prize (the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the first reserved storage number addition designation) (Command) and information regarding the display mode of the specific display (display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency) are deleted, and the contents of the first start prize-winning command storage area are shifted (step S90664).

If the received effect control command is the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command (step S90665), the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area ( Step S90666). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the high base state flag is set (step S90667A), and if not set, shifts to step S90668. If it is set, the second hold display is updated (step S90667B). Specifically, the active display in the active display portion 9018d is erased, and the second hold display is shifted one by one (for example, the first second hold display of the hold storage display portion 9018c is shifted to the active display portion 9018d. If the second to fourth second hold displays of the hold storage display unit 9018c are lit, the second hold display displayed second is shifted to the first display area. Then, the second hold display displayed third is shifted to the second display area, and the second hold display displayed fourth is shifted to the third display area).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the active storage area (step S90667C). Specifically, the information about the display mode pattern, the change timing, and the operation frequency stored in the first storage area of the second start-winning command storage area is stored in the active storage area.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101, the command at the time of the start winning a prize stored in the first storage area of the second start winning award command storage area (the symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the first reserved storage number addition designation). (Command) and information regarding the display mode of the specific display (display mode pattern, change timing, and operation frequency) are deleted, and the contents of the second start prize-winning command storage area are shifted (step S90668).

If the received effect control command is the normal state background designating command (step S90669), the effect control CPU 90101 causes the effect display device 909 to change the background screen to a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a background screen with a blue background color). ) (Step S90670). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a normal state (low probability/low base state), a background mode corresponding to the normal state is displayed to produce an effect mode according to the normal state (hereinafter, It is controlled to the normal production mode). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the high base state flag if set (steps S90671A and S90671B), and switches the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 9018c from the second hold display to the first hold display. (Step S90671C).

If the received effect control command is the time saving state background designation command (step S90672), the effect control CPU 90101 changes the background screen in the effect display device 909 to a background screen corresponding to the time saving state (for example, a background screen with a green background color). ) (Step S90673). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), a background screen corresponding to the time-saving state is displayed to produce an effect mode (hereinafter, It is also controlled to a time saving effect mode). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the time saving state flag if not set (steps S90674A, S90674B), and switches the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 9018c from the first hold display to the second hold display (step S90674A, S90674B). S90674C).

If the received effect control command is a probability variation state background designation command (step S90676), the effect control CPU 90101 causes the background screen in the effect display device 909 to be a background screen corresponding to the probability variation state (for example, a background screen with a red background color). ) (Step S90677). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variation state (high probability/high base state), a background mode corresponding to the probability variation state is displayed to produce an effect mode according to the probability variation state (hereinafter, It is controlled to the probability variation production mode). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 proceeds to step S90674A.

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step S90679). For example, if the received production control command is a customer waiting demo designation command, a customer waiting demo designation command reception flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been received is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (step S90705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90101 first executes a hold display control process for controlling the display mode of the hold display (step S90800A). Hereinafter, the effect of changing the display mode of the hold display may be referred to as "prefetching notice effect".

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs any one of steps S90800 to S90807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the production control process process, the display state of the production display device 909 is controlled and the variable display of the production symbol is realized, but the control regarding the variable display of the production symbol in synchronization with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second. The control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process. In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the second special symbol may be configured to be executed by different effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be possible to determine which special symbol variable display is being executed depending on which effect control process process the variable display of the effect symbol is being executed.

Fluctuating pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800): It is confirmed whether a varying pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect design fluctuation start process (step S90801).

Production symbol variation start processing (step S90801): control is performed so that variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect symbol (step S90802).

Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S90802): The switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) forming the fluctuation pattern is controlled, and the end of the fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect design fluctuation stop processing (step S90803).

Production symbol variation stop processing (step S90803): The variation of the production symbol is stopped, and the control for deriving and displaying the display result (stopped symbol) is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S90804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

Big hit display process (step S90804): After the end of the variable time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the big hit on the effect display device 909. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (step S90805).

Processing during round (step S90805): Display control during round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S90806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit ending process (step S90807).

Post-round processing (step S90806): display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (step S90805).

Big hit end production processing (step S90807): In the production display device 909, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variable pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the hold display control process. In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not a new start prize has been generated and a new start prize command has been received (step S903901). Specifically, if a new command is stored in the first start prize-winning command storage area or the second start prize-winning command storage area shown in FIG. 62, a new start winning occurs and a new start winning prize is generated. It can be determined that the command has been received. If no new start winning award command has been received, the hold display control process is terminated.

If a new start winning command is received, it is determined whether or not the high base state flag is set (step S903902), and if not set (in the low base state), a new hold is made. It is determined whether the storage is the first reserved storage (step S903903). Specifically, when the storage area storing the new start-winning command is the first start-winning command storage area, it is determined that the new reserved memory is the first reserved memory. If it is the second hold storage, the hold display control process is ended as it is.

If it is the first hold storage, it is determined whether the display mode pattern of all the first hold displays is Pt1′ (step S903904). Specifically, when display mode patterns other than Pt1′ are stored in the first start winning award storage area shown in FIG. 62A, all the display mode patterns of the first hold display are Pt1′. If it is determined that there is no display mode pattern other than Pt1′ in the first start winning prize storage area, it is determined that all the display mode patterns of the first hold display are Pt1′. When the first hold display of the display mode pattern other than Pt1′ exists, the new display mode pattern of the first hold display is determined as Pt1′ (step S903905), while the first hold of the display mode pattern other than Pt1′ is determined. When there is no display, a display mode pattern determination lottery for determining a new display mode pattern for the first hold display is performed (step S903906). Specifically, the display mode pattern determination lottery is performed using the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode pattern determination lottery table. In the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 65, the display mode patterns (Pt1′ to Pt1′ to Pt1′ to Pt1′ to Although the determination value corresponding to Pt4′) is assigned, in the example shown in FIG. 65, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown for the sake of simplifying the description. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for display mode pattern determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

FIG. 65(A) is a first display mode pattern determination lottery table used when the number of reserved memories is 1, and FIG. 65(B) is a first display mode pattern determination lottery table used when the number of reserved memories is 2 or more. It is a display mode pattern determination lottery table. Here, the “reserved storage number” means the first reserved storage number when the newly generated reserved storage is the first reserved storage (that is, when the display mode pattern determination lottery in step S903906 is executed). In the case where the newly generated pending storage is the second pending storage (that is, when the display mode pattern determination lottery in step S903924 is executed), the second pending storage number is meant.

First, the first display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 65(A) will be described. For example, when the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), Pt1' is 20% and Pt2' is 30% Thus, Pt4' is determined at a rate of 50%.

For example, when the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit or small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), Pt1' is 25% and Pt2' is 35%. In proportion, Pt4′ is determined at a ratio of 40%.

For example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach (when the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), Pt1' is 50% Thus, Pt2′ is determined at a rate of 30% and Pt4′ is determined at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the winning determination result is other, Pt1′ is determined at a rate of 90% and Pt2′ is determined at a rate of 10%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the display mode of the specific display can be changed only once for each change, Pt3′ in which the number of changes is two when the number of reserved memories is one. Is a configuration that is not selected. If the display mode of the specific display can be changed a plurality of times during one change, Pt3′ may be selectable even when the number of pending storage is one.

Next, the second display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 65B will be described. For example, when the winning determination result is a probability big jackpot or a normal jackpot (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), Pt1' is 10% and Pt2' is 20%. Thus, Pt3' is determined at a rate of 30% and Pt4' is determined at a rate of 40%.

For example, when the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), Pt1' is 15% and Pt2' is 20%. In proportion, Pt3' is determined to be 30% and Pt4' is determined to be 35%.

For example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach (when the designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), Pt1' is 40% Then, Pt2′ is determined at a rate of 30%, Pt3′ is determined at a rate of 20%, and Pt4′ is determined at a rate of 10%.

For example, when the winning determination result is other, Pt1′ is determined at a rate of 90% and Pt2′ is determined at a rate of 10%.

As a result, the degree of expectation for each display mode pattern is Pt1′<Pt2′<Pt3′<Pt4′. Further, the expectation degree indicated by the display mode of the hold display is white<blue<red. It should be noted that a display mode pattern that can be selected only when a big hit or a specific big hit may be provided. Further, a display mode (for example, rainbow) that can be changed only in the display mode pattern may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the display mode pattern is determined at the same rate when the winning determination result is the probability variation big hit and when it is the normal big hit, but the display mode patterns are set at different rates. It may be decided to decide. Similarly, the display mode pattern may be determined at different rates depending on whether the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit or a small hit.

Further, the ratio of determining the display mode pattern may be different depending on more detailed conditions. For example, the display mode pattern may be determined at different ratios based on the type of reach effect indicated by the variation category command, the presence/absence of pseudo continuous, or the number of pseudo continuous.

After step S903905 or step S903906, when the display mode pattern other than Pt1′ is determined, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the change timing determination lottery for determining the change timing of the display mode of the specific display ( (N in step S903907, S903908). Specifically, the change timing determination lottery table is used to perform the change timing determination lottery.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a change timing determination lottery table. In the change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 66, according to the winning determination results (probably large jackpot or normal jackpot, suddenly jackpot jackpot (a sudden jackpot) or small hit, super-reach miss, etc.) and the number of reserved memories (1 to 4). Although the determination values corresponding to the change timings (active, first, second, and third) are assigned, the assigned determination values are assigned to simplify the description in the example shown in FIG. 66. Is shown. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for change timing determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

Note that, here, the "number of reserved memories" means the number of first reserved memories when the newly generated reserved memory is the first reserved memory (that is, when the change timing determination lottery in step S903908 is executed). That is, when the newly generated pending storage is the second pending storage (that is, when the change timing determination lottery in step S903926 is executed), it is the second pending storage count.

FIG. 66(A) is a first change timing determination lottery table used when the number of changes is 1 (that is, the display mode pattern is Pt2′ or Pt4′), and FIG. 66(B) is It is a second change timing determination lottery table used when the number of changes is 2 (that is, when the display mode pattern is Pt3′).

First, the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 66A will be described. For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4", and the winning determination result is a probability big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), the "third" is At a rate of 40%, "second" is determined at a rate of 30%, "first" is determined at a rate of 40%, and "active" is determined at a rate of 10%.

For example, when the number of stored memories is "4" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "third" Is 37%, the "second" is 33%, the "first" is 17%, and the "active" is 13%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is “4” and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). In the case), the ratio of "3rd" is 13%, "2nd" is 17%, "1st" is 33%, and "Active" is 37%. It

For example, if the number of reserved memories is “4” and the winning determination result is other, the “third” is 10%, the “second” is 20%, and the “first” is Is determined at a rate of 30%, and “active” is determined at a rate of 40%.

In addition, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), the "second Is determined at a rate of 50%, "first" is determined at a rate of 30%, and "active" is determined at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "second" Is 40%, the "first" is 35%, and the "active" is 25%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). In the case), the "second" is determined at a rate of 25%, the "first" is determined at a rate of 35%, and the "active" is determined at a rate of 40%.

For example, if the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is other, the ratio of “second” is 20%, “first” is 30%, and “active” is It is determined at a rate of 50%.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "2", and the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), the "first piece" Is determined at a rate of 70%, and “active” is determined at a rate of 30%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "2" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "first" Is determined at a rate of 60%, and “active” is determined at a rate of 40%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "2" and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). In the case), "first" is determined at a rate of 40%, and "active" is determined at a rate of 60%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "2" and the winning determination result is other, the "first" is determined at a rate of 30% and the "active" is determined at a rate of 70%.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved storages is "1", "active" is determined at a rate of 100%.

Next, the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 66(B) will be described. For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4", and the winning determination result is a probability variation big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), "third" and 30% of the "2nd" combination, 25% of the "3rd" and "1st" combination, and 20% of the "3rd" and "active" combination Then, the combination of the "second" and the "first" is 13%, the combination of the "second" and "active" is 7%, and the combination of the "first" and the "active" is 7%. The combination is determined at a rate of 5%.

For example, when the number of stored memories is "4" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "third" And the combination of "2nd" is 20%, the combination of "3rd" and "1st" is 25%, and the combination of "3rd" and "active" is 25%. In terms of proportion, the combination of "second" and "first" is 15%, the combination of "second" and "active" is 10%, and "first" and "active" The combination of is determined at a rate of 5%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4" and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). In the case of), the combination of "3rd" and "2nd" is 5%, the combination of "3rd" and "1st" is 10%, "3rd" and "3rd" The combination of "active" is 15%, the combination of "second" and "first" is 25%, the combination of "second" and "active" is 25%, The combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "4" and the winning determination result is other, the combination of "third" and "second" is 5%, "third" and "1". The combination of "the third" is 7%, the combination of "the third" and "active" is 13%, the combination of the "second" and "the first" is 20%, The combination of "second" and "active" is determined at a rate of 25%, and the combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 30%.

In addition, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the winning determination result is a probability big hit or a normal big hit (when the symbol designating command is C401 (H) or C402 (H)), "the second one" 50% of the combination of "1" and "1st", 30% of the combination of "2nd" and "active", and 20% of the combination of "1st" and "active" Is decided.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is "3" and the winning determination result is a sudden probability big hit or a small hit (when the symbol designating command is C403 (H) or C404 (H)), "second" And the combination of "first" is 40%, the combination of "second" and "active" is 35%, and the combination of "first" and "active" is 25%. ,It is determined.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is out of super reach (the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)). Case), the combination of the "second" and the "first" is 25%, the combination of the "second" and "active" is 35%, the "first" and the "active". 40% of the combinations are determined.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3” and the winning determination result is other, the combination of the “second” and the “first” is 20%, the “second” and the “active”. The combination of "" is determined at a rate of 30%, and the combination of "first" and "active" is determined at a rate of 50%.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved storages is “2”, the combination of “first” and “active” is determined at a rate of 100%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the structure in which the reliability of the big hit is higher as the display mode changes at an earlier timing after the hold display is started, is not limited to this. The reliability of the big hit may be low as the display mode changes at an early timing after the hold display is started.

In the present embodiment, the change timing is determined using the change timing determination table shown in FIG. 66, but the change timing is determined at different rates based on which display mode is changed. It may be done. For example, in the case of changing to red, the timing (for example, “active”) that is later than the case of changing to blue may be determined as the change timing.

In the present embodiment, the change timing is determined at the same rate depending on whether the winning determination result is the probability varying big hit or the normal big hit, but the changing timing is determined at different rates. It may be that. Similarly, the change timing may be determined at different rates depending on whether the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit or a small hit.

Further, the rate of determining the change timing may be different depending on more detailed conditions. For example, the change timing may be determined at different rates based on the type of reach effect indicated by the variation category command, the presence/absence of pseudo-repeating, or the number of pseudo-repeating.

After performing Y in step S903907 or executing step S903908, the effect control CPU 90101 stores the determination result (display mode pattern and change timing) in the first start prize-winning command storage area (step S903909), and sets a low operation frequency. It is stored (step S903910). Then, a new first hold display in white is started (step S903911).

If the high base state flag is set in step S903902, it is determined whether the new pending storage is the second pending storage (step S903921). Specifically, if the storage area in which the new start-winning command is stored is the second start-winning command storage area, it is determined that the new reserved memory is the second reserved memory. If it is the first hold storage, the hold display control process is ended as it is.

If it is the second hold storage, it is determined whether the display mode pattern of all the second hold displays is Pt1′ (step S903922). Specifically, when a display mode pattern other than Pt1′ is stored in the second starting prize winning storage area shown in FIG. 62B, all the display mode patterns of the second hold display are Pt1′. When it is determined that there is no display mode pattern other than Pt1' in the second start winning prize storage area, it is determined that all the display mode patterns of the second hold display are Pt1'. When the second hold display of the display manner pattern other than Pt1′ exists, the new display manner pattern of the second hold display is determined as Pt1′ (step S903923), while the second hold of the display manner pattern other than Pt1′ is determined. If there is no display, a display mode pattern determination lottery for determining a new display mode pattern for the second hold display is performed (step S903924). Specifically, the display mode pattern determination lottery is performed using the display mode pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG.

After step S903923 or step S903924, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the change timing determination lottery for determining the change timing when the display mode pattern other than Pt1′ is determined (N in step S903925, S903926). ). Specifically, the change timing determination lottery table is used to perform the change timing determination lottery.

After executing Y in step S903925 or after executing step S903926, the effect control CPU 90101 stores the determination result (display mode pattern and change timing) in the second start prize-winning command storage area (step S903927), and sets a low frequency as the operation frequency. It is stored (step S903928). Then, a new second hold display in white is started (step S903929).

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 63. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S90812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect design variation start process (step S90801) (step S90813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is also transmitted when power is restored (see step S9044). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the receipt of the variation pattern command, it shifts to the effect symbol variation start processing and starts the variation display of the effect symbol, so the variation of the effect symbol is not received by the display result designation command without receiving the variation pattern command. The display does not start.

68 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S90801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 63. In the effect symbol variation start processing, the effect control CPU 90101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S908001). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 displays the effect design display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step S908001 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). (Symbol) is determined (step S908002). That is, the CPU 90101 for effect control executes the process of step S908002 to display the result of variable display of the identification information (the stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (pattern) is realized. When the pseudo pattern is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 90101, in step S908002, gives a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445" as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo pattern). , A combination of a big hit design that does not reach and one design that is offset by one) are also determined. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step S908002, the effect control CPU 90101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on only the variation pattern command. ..

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909. In the example shown in FIG. 69, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 stops. As a design, the combination of the effect designs in which the three designs have the same even number is determined. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates “probable variation big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 has 3 symbols as a stop symbol. The combination of the effect symbols arranged in the same odd number symbol is determined.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "sudden probability big hit" or "small hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 4 designation command or the display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 90101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as "135" as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of "disappearance" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), combinations of effect symbols other than the above are determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols having two left and right symbols is determined. In addition, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 909 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

The production control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols and the numerical values are associated with each other, to determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

As for the effect symbols, a stop symbol that reminds of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right sides are all the same symbol) is called a big hit symbol. Further, in this embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed in a state where the left, middle and right are aligned with odd symbols, it is recalled that the odd symbols are probability variation jackpots. A pattern that reminds us of such a sudden change jackpot is called a sudden change pattern. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the case of a normal big hit, since the left, middle and right are stopped and displayed in a state where even symbols are aligned, it is recalled that even-numbered symbols are not sure-variable big hits (normally big hits). .. Such a pattern that reminds me that it does not become a probability variation jackpot is called a non-probability variation pattern. In addition, a stop design that reminds the user of disengagement is called a disengagement design.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a notice effect (a notice effect excluding the look-ahead notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect, a character notice effect, or a dialogue notice effect) on the effect display device 909 during the variable display of the effect symbol. A notice effect setting process for determining whether or not and setting an effect mode of notice effect is executed (step S908003).

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 executes operation frequency determination processing for determining the operation frequency of the specific display (hold display, active display) (step S908003A).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 selects a change pattern, a notice effect when the notice effect is executed, and a process table corresponding to the change effect when the notice effect is executed (step S908004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S908005).

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 90101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the effect display devices (effect parts) such as the effect display device 909 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect design are described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table, and performs control for displaying effect symbols in a variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

The process table shown in FIG. 70 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 9080. The process table is prepared according to each variation pattern. When it is determined to execute the notice effect, the effect control CPU 90101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect in step S90804.

In the process table used when performing effect control for a variation pattern involving reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. It should be noted that instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect. May be.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), an effect device (effect display device 909 as effect parts, effect parts). The control of the various lamps and the speaker 9027 as an effect part is executed (step S908006). For example, a command is output to the VDP 90109 to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 909. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 9070 in order to output sound from the speaker 9027.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90101 performs control so that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command in a one-to-one manner. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S908007).

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect in the effect of changing the effect design (step S90802) (step S908008).

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the operation frequency determination process. In the operation frequency determination process, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a process (steps S90450 to S904506) for determining whether or not to execute the change effect in the variation to be started, the type of the change effect when executing, and the specific display of the execution target. After the execution, the processing (steps S904507 to S904511) for determining the operation frequency of each specific display is executed.

First, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the red specific display is displayed (step S904500), and if it is displayed, the process proceeds to step S904507. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the display mode is changed only for the single specific display, when the red specific display (specific display of the most reliable display mode) is already displayed, Even if the change effect is executed, further change in the display mode cannot be expected, so the change effect cannot be executed. It should be noted that even if it is not possible to expect a further change in the display mode, the change effect may be able to be executed, and if the gaming machine is capable of changing the display mode of a plurality of specific displays, it is the most reliable. The change effect may be executable even when the specific display in the high display mode is displayed.

When the red specific display is not displayed, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a change effect execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the change effect in the variation to be started (step S904501). Specifically, the change effect execution lottery is performed using the change effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 72(A).

FIG. 72A is an explanatory diagram showing a change effect execution lottery table. In the change effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 72(A), whether or not the change effect is executed and the kind of change effect when the change effect is executed depending on whether or not there is a change schedule of the specific display in the start fluctuation Although determination values corresponding to (first change effect, second change effect) are assigned, in the example shown in FIG. 72(A), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown to simplify the description. Has been done. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for change effect execution lottery, and determines it as a decision item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

It is to be noted that, regarding whether or not there is a plan to change the specific display in the variation to be started, the command storing area for the start winning a prize shown in FIG. 62 (if the variation to be started is a variation based on the first reserved memory, the first start winning command If the storage area and the variation to be started are those based on the second reserved memory, the determination is made based on the second start winning award command storage area). At this point, since the start winning award command storage area is not updated (steps S90664 and S90668) based on the start of the variation, the information about the variation to be started is one of the starting winning award command storage areas. It is stored in the eye storage area. Therefore, "active" is stored as the change timing in the first storage area, "first" is stored as the change timing in the second storage area, or the change in the third storage area is stored. If the "second" is stored as the timing or the "third" is stored as the change timing in the fourth storage area, it is determined that there is a change schedule.

For example, when there is a change schedule, the first change effect is determined to be executed at a rate of 70%, and the second change effect is determined to be performed at a rate of 30%. When there is no change plan, it is determined that the first change effect is executed at a rate of 3%, the second change effect is performed at a rate of 7%, and the change effect is not executed at a rate of 90%. It

In this way, when there is a planned change, any change effect is executed. That is, the display mode can be changed only when the change effect is executed.

In this way, when there is a change schedule, the first change effect is executed at a higher rate than the second change effect, and when there is no change schedule, the second change effect is the first change effect. Is configured to run at a higher rate than. As a result, the display mode of the specific effect is changed at a higher rate when the first change effect is executed than when the second change effect is executed. Therefore, it indicates whether or not the display mode of the specific display has changed depending on the type of change effect.

In the present embodiment, the first change effect and the second change effect are provided as the types of change effects, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a change effect in which the display mode of the specific display always changes at the time of execution may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency is determined after determining the type of change effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation frequency of the specific display is determined prior to the type of change effect, and the type of change effect is determined based on the operation frequency (for example, if the frequency is low, the second change effect is likely to be selected). Good.

After step S904501, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether to execute the change effect (step S904502), and if not, shifts to step S904507. When the change effect is executed, it is determined whether there is a change schedule (step S904503), and when there is no change schedule (that is, when the change effect is executed but the display mode does not change), a blue specific display. Is displayed (step S904503A), and if not displayed, the execution target determination lottery for determining the specific display of the execution target of the change effect is executed (step S904503B). Specifically, the execution target determination lottery is performed using the execution target determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72(B).

FIG. 72B is an explanatory diagram showing an execution target determination lottery table. In the execution target determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72(B), a change effect execution target (active display, first hold display, second hold display, third hold display) in accordance with the number of held memories. Although the determination value corresponding to is assigned, the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown in the example shown in FIG. 72B for the sake of simplicity. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for execution target determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

Note that, here, the “reserved storage number” is the first reserved storage number when the variation to be started is the variation based on the first retained storage, and is the variation based on the second reserved storage when it is the variation. It is the second number of reserved memories. It should be noted that at this stage, the number of pending storages is not subtracted (steps S90662 and S90666) based on the start of fluctuation.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is “4”, the active display is targeted for execution at a rate of 40%, the first pending display is targeted for execution at a rate of 20%, and the second display is performed. It is determined that the holding display of No. 2 is an execution target at a rate of 20%, and the third pending display is an execution target at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is “3”, the active display is targeted for execution at a rate of 60%, the first pending display is targeted for execution at a rate of 20%, and the second It is determined at a rate of 20% that the pending display of is targeted for execution.

For example, when the number of reserved memories is “2”, the active display is determined to be executed at a rate of 80%, and the first suspended display is determined to be executed at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the number of pending storage is “1”, the active display is determined to be executed at a rate of 100%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the active display is configured to be easily executed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for fluctuations during execution.

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the hold display that is already displayed can be determined as the execution target of the change effect, but here, the execution target of the change effect in which the display mode does not change (so-called gasse effect) is set. In order to determine, the pending display which is not displayed may be the execution target. For example, when the number of stored memories is “3” (that is, when only the active display, the first suspended display, and the second suspended display are displayed when the change effect is executed). Also, the third hold display can be determined as the execution target of the change effect, and when the third hold display is determined as the execution target, the change effect is displayed in the display area of the third hold display. It may be performed (the hammer swings in the case of the first change effect, and the arrow passes by in the case of the second change effect).

In S904503A, if the blue specific display is displayed, the blue specific display is determined as the execution target of the change effect (step S904504). This makes it possible to give the player an expectation that the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has already changed to blue will further change. Even when the specific display in which the display mode is already changed to blue is displayed, a change effect (a change effect in which the display mode does not change) in which another specific display (white specific display) is executed. (So-called production) may be executed. However, even if the specific display that has already changed to blue is already displayed, it is possible that the player will be stressed if the gasse effect that targets the other specific display is frequently executed. To be Therefore, even with a configuration capable of executing a gaze effect in which a specific display that is different from the specific display that has already changed to blue is executable, a change effect that targets the specific display that has already changed to blue is executed. It is desirable to perform at a high rate.

In step S904503, if there is a change schedule, the specific display (active display, hold display) that is the change schedule is determined as the execution target of the change effect (step S904505). As described above, at this point in time, since the start winning award command storage area is not updated (steps S90664 and S90668) based on the start of variation, the specific display corresponding to the storage area 1 is changed. If it is a schedule, "Active" is displayed. If the specific display corresponding to the storage area 2 is scheduled to change, "1st" is displayed. If the specific display corresponding to the storage area 3 is scheduled to change, "2nd" is displayed. If the specific display corresponding to the storage area 4 is scheduled to change, "third" is determined as the execution target of the change effect.

After performing any of steps S904503B, S904504, and S904505, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the type of change effect to be executed and the specific display of the execution target (step S904506). A process table corresponding to the change effect of the content set here is selected in step S908004, and step S908006 and step S908105 described later are executed, whereby the change effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101, the hold specific value K for specifying the number of the hold display (that is, the first hold display if K=1, two if K=2. "1" is set in the eye hold display, the third hold display if K=3, and the fourth hold display if K=4 (step S904507), and the operation frequency of each specific display is set. The operation frequency determination lottery for determining is executed. Specifically, the operation frequency determination lottery is performed using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72(C).

FIG. 72C is an explanatory diagram showing an operation frequency determination lottery table. In the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72(C), the presence/absence of a change in the display mode of the specific display (the change plan of the Kth hold display) and the change effect (change effect to the Kth hold display) are shown. The determination value corresponding to the operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) is assigned according to the above. However, in the example shown in FIG. 72(C), in order to simplify the explanation, the ratio of the assigned determination value is It is shown. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for operation frequency determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

Whether or not the display mode of the specific display is scheduled to change is determined by referring to the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. Specifically, if the reserved specific number K=1, “active” is stored as the fluctuation timing in the first storage area, or if the reserved specific number K=2, the fluctuation timing in the second storage area. “1st” is stored, or if the reserved specific number K=3, then “second” is stored as the change timing in the third storage area, or the reserved specific number K=4. For example, when the “third” is stored as the change timing in the fourth storage area, it is determined that there is a change schedule.

Further, the “change effect” is determined based on the type of change effect set in step S904506 and the execution target. For example, if the specific hold number K=1, the active display is set as the execution target, and if the specific hold number K=2, the first pending display is set as the execution target, the specific hold number K. =3, the second hold display is set as an execution target, and the hold specific number K=4, the third hold display is set as an execution target. It is determined that the change effect is executed.

For example, when there is a change schedule and the first change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 20% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 80%. When there is a change schedule and the second change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined at a rate of 30% and the high frequency is determined at a rate of 70%.

Further, for example, when there is no change schedule and the first change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined to be 40% and the high frequency is determined to be 60%. When there is no change schedule and the second change effect is executed, the low frequency is determined to be 45% and the high frequency is determined to be 55%. When there is no change schedule and the change effect is not executed, the low frequency is determined to be 90% and the high frequency is determined to be 10%.

As described above, as the operation mode of the specific display, which is the execution target of the change effect, the high frequency is more easily determined than the low frequency. Therefore, the specific display having the high frequency of operation is more likely to be the target of change effect execution than the specific display having the low frequency.

Further, the specific display having the change schedule is configured such that the high frequency is more easily determined as the operation frequency than the specific display having no change schedule. Therefore, whether or not there is a change is suggested by the operation frequency.

In the present embodiment, the high frequency and the low frequency are provided as the operation frequencies, but a fixed operation frequency that can be selected only when the change effect is executed may be provided. The player is informed that the change effect will be executed by performing the confirmation operation frequency.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the high frequency is selected as the operation frequency in the specific display having the change schedule at a higher rate than in the specific display having no change schedule. It is not limited. For example, when the specific display with the planned change is displayed, the high frequency is selected as the operation frequency at a higher rate as compared with the case where the specific display with the planned change is not displayed (that is, the changed frequency). Even if the specific display has no schedule, a high frequency is likely to be selected as the operation frequency when a specific display having a change schedule is displayed as another specific display). In addition, the higher the frequency, the higher the ratio may be selected for the specific display that is displayed closer to the specific display that is scheduled to change.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 stores the operation mode of the Kth hold display (step S904509). For example, if K=1, it is the first storage area, if K=2, it is the second storage area, if K=3, it is the third storage area, and if K=4. “High frequency” or “low frequency” is stored as the operation mode in the fourth storage area. The reserved specific number K and the number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number if the variation to be executed is a variation based on the first reserved memory, and the second reserved memory number if the variation to be executed is a variation based on the second reserved memory) ) Is the same value (step S904510). If they are not the same value, 1 is added to the reserved specific number K (step S904511), and the process proceeds to step S904508 again. In this way, the operation frequencies for all the stored storages are determined one by one. The operation frequency determination process ends when the reserved specific number K and the reserved storage number have the same value.

Note that, in step S904508, an operation mode other than the operation frequency may be determined instead of or in addition to the operation frequency. For example, it may be determined whether the mole displayed as the specific display is in a pop-out mode or in a rotating mode.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the effect of the effect in the effect control process processing (step S90802). In the effect symbol fluctuation process, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1 (step S908101), and the value of the fluctuation time timer is decremented by 1 (step S908102). When the process timer times out (step S908103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S908104). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S908105).

After that, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the display position fixing flag indicating that the display position of the specific display is fixed is set (step S904700A), and if it is set, the process proceeds to step S904707. .. The display position fixing flag is a flag that is set during execution of the first change effect, that is, during the execution of the first change effect, the processing of steps S904701 to S904706 (processing for changing the display position of the specific display). ) Is not executed.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that switching of the display positions of all the specific displays is restricted during execution of the first change effect, but at least the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect. If the display position of the other specific display is restricted, the display position of the other specific display may not be restricted.

If the display position fixing flag is not set in step S904700A, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not it is the preset display position change timing (step S904700B). In the present embodiment, the display position change timing is set to an even second after the start of fluctuation, that is, the display position can be changed every 2 seconds. The display position change timing may be determined by lottery or may be determined for each variation pattern.

When it is the display position change timing (Y in step S904700B), the specific display specific number R (R=1 indicates the first specific display (that is, active) when specifying the specific display number. Display), if R=2, the second specific display (that is, the first reserved display), if R=3, the third specific display (that is, the second reserved display), R =4, 1 is set to the fourth specific display (that is, the third reserved display) (step S904701), and whether to switch the display position of the specific display specified by the specific display specific number R Display position switching lottery for determining whether or not is executed (step S904702). Specifically, the display position switching lottery table is used to perform the display position switching lottery.

FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing a display position switching lottery table. In the display position switching lottery table shown in FIG. 74, the determination value corresponding to the presence/absence of switching of the display position is assigned according to the operation frequency, but in the example shown in FIG. 74, the assignment value is assigned to simplify the description. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for display position switching lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

For example, when the operation frequency is high, the display position is switched at a rate of 70% and the display position is not switched at a rate of 30%. Further, for example, when the operation frequency is low, the display position is switched at a rate of 20% and the display position is not switched at a rate of 80%.

If it is determined to switch the display position (Y in step S904703), if the display position of the R-th specific display is the retreat position, it is switched to the advance position, and if it is the advance position, it is changed to the retreat position (step S904704). Then, the value of the specific display specific number R is the number of pending storages (the first pending storage number if the variation to be executed is based on the first pending storage, and the second if the variation to be executed is based on the second pending storage. It is determined whether or not the value is the same as the value obtained by adding 1 to (reserved storage number) (step S904705), and if it is not the same value, 1 is added to the specific display specific number R and the process proceeds to step S904702 again. In this way, the presence/absence of switching of the display positions of all the specific displays is determined one by one. If the values are the same, the process moves to step S904707.

In step S904707, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the display position fixing flag (step S904707A) if it is the execution timing of the first change effect (Y in step S904707), and the display mode of the specific display of the execution object of the change effect. Is determined to be changed (step S904708). If the change is scheduled, the display position of the specific display to be executed is switched to the advance position (step S904709). If the change is not scheduled, the display position of the specific display to be executed is switched to the retracted position (step S904710). Thereby, when the first change effect is executed, the display mode is changed if the display position of the specific display of the execution object of the first change effect is the advance position, and the display mode is not changed if it is the retracted position. It has become.

In step S904711, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the display position fixing flag if it is the end timing of the change effect (Y in step S904711), and if it is set (step S904711A), the specific display of the execution object of the change effect. It is determined whether or not the display mode of (1) is to be changed (step S904712), and if the display mode is to be changed, the display mode of the specific display of the execution target is changed (step S904713). Note that in step S904713, the specific display is set to a display mode corresponding to the type of change effect (for example, when the first change effect is executed, the display mode is switched from the expressionless expression mode to the display mode in which the eyes are open and sweating is performed. On the other hand, when the second change effect is executed, the display mode is switched from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which tears are shed), and then the color changes to blue or red. When the color is changed to blue or red, the expressionless display mode is switched again.

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect design fluctuation stop processing (step S90803) if the change time timer has timed out (step S908111) (step S908112).

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the effect symbol stop symbol is displayed is set (step S908301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, it moves to step S908305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S908304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare production is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed, so the process of displaying the effect symbol stop symbol in step S908302 is executed. Without that, the process moves to step S908305.

When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (delayed symbol, big hit symbol) (step S908302).

After that, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the operation frequency storage area in the start prize winning command storage area and the active display storage area (step S905301). As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency is updated for each change.

When the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are not displayed in the process of step S908302 (that is, when the outlying symbol is displayed) (N in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 produces the effect control CPU 90101. Shifts to step S908311.

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S908302 (Y in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S908304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is confirmed whether or not the big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that or the small hit/sudden probability big hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S908305). .. When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit/sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S908306), and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S908307). If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit/suddenly-variable big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the set flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step S908308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1, a rendering device (a rendering display device 909 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, a speaker 9027 as a rendering component, and a movable member 9078 as a rendering component and rendering. The control of the blade accessory 9079a, 9079b) is executed (step S908309).

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the big hit display process (step S90804) (step S908310).

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit has occurred (N in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 resets a predetermined flag (step S908311). For example, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. Note that the effect control CPU 90101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process process or the fourth symbol process process (for example, as shown in step S90811 of FIG. 67, a variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, for the symbol variation designation command, since it is referred to in both the production control process process and the fourth symbol process process, as shown in this embodiment, the production symbol variation stop process at the end of variation, etc. It is desirable to reset in or in the big hit end effect processing when the big hit ends. Then, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90803) (step S908312).

76 and 77 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples of the effect display device 909 when the change effect is executed. For example, FIGS. 76(A1) to (A3) show display examples in the case where the first change effect for the hold display in which the display position is the advance position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 76(A1), an active display 9051 and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as specific displays, and the display mode of any specific display is white. As for the display position of each specific display, only the first reserved display 9052 is the advance position, and the other specific displays (active display 9051, reserved displays 9053, 9054) are the retracted positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 76(A2), the first change effect for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the advance position is executed. At this time, the first hold display 9052 hit by the hammer X is switched to a display mode in which the eyes are opened and sweat is discharged. Then, as shown in FIG. 76(A3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 on which the first change effect is executed changes from white to blue.

Further, for example, FIGS. 76(B1) to (B3) show display examples in the case where the first change effect for the hold display in which the display position is the retracted position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 76(B1), an active display 9051 and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as specific displays, and the display mode of any specific display is white. Further, the display position of each specific display is the retracted position. Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B2), the first change effect for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the retracted position is executed. At this time, the hammer X in the first change effect does not hit the first hold display 9052. Then, as shown in FIG. 76(B3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 in which the first change effect is executed does not change.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific display is changed at a different rate depending on the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect (100% changes in the advance position and the retracted position). If so, it does not change 100%).

Further, for example, FIGS. 77(A1) to (A3) show display examples in the case where the second change effect for the hold display in which the display position is the advance position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 77(A1), an active display 9051 and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as specific displays, and the display mode of any specific display is white. As for the display position of each specific display, only the first reserved display 9052 is the advance position, and the other specific displays (active display 9051, reserved displays 9053, 9054) are the retracted positions. Next, as shown in FIG. 77(A2), the second change effect for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the advance position is executed. At this time, the first hold display 9052 hit by the arrow Y is switched to a display mode in which tears are shed (a display mode different from that when hit with the hammer X in the first change effect). Then, as shown in FIG. 77(A3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 on which the second change effect is executed changes from white to blue.

Further, for example, FIGS. 77(B1) to (B3) show display examples in the case where the second change effect targeting the hold display in which the display position is the retracted position is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 77(B1), an active display and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as the specific display 9051, and the display mode of any specific display is white. Further, the display position of each specific display is the retracted position. Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B2), the second change effect for the first hold display 9052 whose display position is the retracted position is executed. At this time, the first hold display 9052 hit by the arrow Y is switched to a display mode in which tears are shed (a display mode different from that when hit with the hammer X in the first change effect). Then, as shown in FIG. 77(B3), the display mode of the first hold display 9052 on which the second change effect is executed changes from white to blue.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the second change effect is executed, the display mode can be changed regardless of whether the display position of the specific display is the advance position or the retreat position. Has become. Even when the second change effect is executed, a pattern in which the shot Y does not hit the specific display is provided as a pattern in which the display mode of the specific display to be executed does not change.

As described above, according to this embodiment, it is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and a mode involving operation (in this example, a mode in which the display position is switched to the advance position or the retreat position, A specific display (in this example, an active display corresponding to a change in execution) corresponding to a variable display in a mode in which the expression is switched from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which the eyes are opened to sweat and the display mode in which tears are flown) The display mode of the specific display (in this example, the display color (white, blue, red). The display, the pattern, the position, the range, etc. can be displayed. (In this example, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, an active display is displayed by performing steps S90663B and S90667B, and a hold display is displayed by performing steps S903911 and S903929). Then, a portion for changing the display mode of the specific display by performing step S904713, and a change suggestion effect (in this example, a change effect (first change effect, second change effect) that suggests a change in the display mode of the specific display. )) can be executed change suggestion effect execution means (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 sets the change effect in step S904506, selects the process table according to the change effect in step S908004, and step S908006. The part which executes the change effect by performing S908105).

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the specific display means operates the specific display when the change suggesting effect is executed (in this example, the display position (extended position, retracted position). The display mode of the specific display can be changed at different ratios depending on other operation modes such as frequency (high frequency, low frequency) and display direction (for example, downward or rightward). By performing steps S904707 to S904709, the effect control microcomputer 90100 displays the specific display at a rate of 100% when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position. While changing the mode, the display mode of the specific display is not changed when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the retracted position (the display mode of the specific display is changed at a rate of 0%. Let it be)). This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of displaying both the active display and the hold display, and both of them can be displayed in a mode involving operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the active display and the hold display may be displayed in a mode that involves an operation. Further, for example, only one of the active display and the hold display may be displayed.

Further, although the active mode and the hold mode have common operation modes and display modes, the present invention is not limited to this, and the active mode and the hold mode can be displayed in different operation modes and display modes. May be

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode pattern and the change timing are determined at the time of starting winning, and the presence/absence of the change effect and the operation frequency are determined at the start of the variation, but the determination timing is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the display mode pattern may not be determined at the time of starting winning, but whether or not to change the display mode during the variation may be determined at each variation start (that is, the change timing is also determined at the variation start time). Alternatively, the presence/absence of a change effect or the operation frequency may be determined at the time of winning the start prize.

Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum four held displays can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if both the first hold display and the second hold display can be displayed, a maximum of eight hold displays can be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a change effect is suggested that suggests a change in the display mode of a single specific display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a change in the display mode of a plurality of specific displays is collectively performed. It may be possible to execute the change effect suggested by. For example, a change effect may be executed that suggests that two arrows are shot toward different specific displays and the display mode of the specific display hit by the arrows changes.

In the present embodiment, whether the display position of the specific display is the advance position or the retreat position only when a part of the change suggestion effects (first change effect) of the plurality of types of change suggestion effects is executed. Although the display mode of the specific display changes at different rates depending on the ratio, when executing all types of change suggestion effects, the display mode of the specific display changes at different rates depending on whether the display position is the advance position or the retreat position. The display mode of the specific display may be changed.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the change suggestion effect producing means causes the first change suggestion effect (the first change effect in this example) and the second change suggestion effect (the second change effect in the present example). The change suggestion effect can be executed out of a plurality of types of change suggestion effects including the change effect) (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs any of the steps by performing steps S90804, S908006, and S908105). The specific display means can display the specific display in different operation modes depending on whether the change suggestion effect to be executed is the first change suggesting effect or the second change suggesting effect. Yes (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs step S904713 to switch from the expressionless display mode to the display mode in which the eyes are open and sweating is performed when performing the first change effect, and the specific display is performed. On the other hand, when executing the second change effect, the expression mode is switched from the expressionless expression mode to the display mode in which tears are shed to display the specific display. The operation frequency changes depending on which change suggestion effect is executed. It may be.) decided. This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific display after the change effect is executed is different depending on the executed change effect, but before or during the change effect is executed. The display mode of the specific display may be different depending on the change effect to be executed. For example, when a change effect in which an apple falls from the sky is executed, the display mode of the specific display may be switched to a mode in which the mouth is opened before the apple is displayed, or after the apple is displayed. The display mode of the specific display may be switched in such a manner that the mouth is opened before the apple reaches the specific display.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the specific display unit operates in the specific display operation mode (in this example, operation frequency (high frequency, low frequency) before the change suggestion effect is executed. The display mode of the specific display can be changed at different ratios depending on the position (advance position, retreat position) or the display direction (eg, downward or rightward). The effect control microcomputer 90100 executes the step S904508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72C, so that the operation frequency of the specific display which is the execution object of the change effect is high. The change rate of the display mode is different when the frequency is low.) This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means displays the specific display in a mode that involves an operation regardless of whether or not the display mode is changed (in this example, the display position (extend (The position, the retracted position) are displayed in a switching manner), and the change suggestion effect executing means can execute the change suggestion effect at different rates depending on the operation mode of the specific display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 is By executing step S904508 using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72C, a change effect (first change effect) is generated when the operation frequency is high compared to when the operation frequency is low. , Second change effect) is easy to execute). This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means can display the specific display by switching between the specific operation mode (in this example, the advance position) and the non-specific operation mode (in this example, the retracted position). In the example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can execute steps S904704, S904709, and S904710), and the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed is the specific operation mode. The display mode can be changed (in this example, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904713, the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position. The display mode of the specific display can be changed). This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the change suggestion effect executing means includes a plurality of first change suggestion effects (first change effect in this example) and second change suggestion effects (second change effect in this example). It is possible to execute any of the change suggesting effects of the type of change suggesting effects (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes any of the change effects by performing steps S90804, S908006, and S908105). The specific display means can display the specific display by switching between the specific operation mode (in this example, the advance position) and the non-specific operation mode (in this example, the retracted position) (in this example, the effect control micro). The computer 90100 can execute steps S904704, S904709, and S904710), and can change the display mode of the specific display when the operation mode of the specific display is the specific operation mode when the first change suggestion effect is executed. Yes (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes steps S904707 to S904713 to display the specific display when the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the first change effect is the advance position. On the other hand, when the second change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of the operation mode of the specific display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can By executing steps S904711 to S904713, the display mode of the specific display can be changed regardless of whether the display position of the specific display that is the execution target of the second change effect is the advance position or the retracted position. ) Decided. As a result, the effect of production can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest that the advantageous state is controlled by the display mode of the specific display (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 displays the display shown in FIG. 65 in steps S903906 and S903924). By determining the display mode pattern using the mode pattern determination lottery table, the display mode changes the reliability of the big hit (white <blue <red) is suggested), and the display mode of the specific display changes depending on the operation mode of the specific display. It is possible to indicate whether or not (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the operation frequency by using the operation frequency determination lottery table shown in FIG. 72C in step S904508. Therefore, it is assumed that the reliability (low frequency <high frequency) for changing the display mode of the specific display is suggested. As a result, the effect of production can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, a specific display that suggests whether or not the display mode changes by the operation mode (specific display on the suggesting side) and a specific display that suggests whether or not the display mode changes (implication The specific display) is the same specific display, but the present invention is not limited to this, even if the specific display of the suggesting side and the specific display of the suggested side are different from each other. Good. For example, it may be suggested that the display mode of the specific display B displayed adjacent to the specific display A changes depending on whether or not the operation frequency of the specific display A is high.

In the present embodiment, two types of change suggesting effects are provided, but only one type of change suggesting effects may be provided, or three or more types of change suggesting effects may be provided. May be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed according to the starting winning order in which the game balls have won the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. ..

Further, in this embodiment, the pending change pattern and the change timing are decided by different lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of data including information on the pending change pattern and the change timing (that is, data that determines in advance which display mode at which timing) is provided, and the pending change according to any of the data is performed. It may be determined by lottery whether to perform.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed at a timing before the next change after the hold display is started (for example, during the change being executed when the hold display is started). Although the aspect is configured so as not to change, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the display aspect of the hold display at a timing before the start of the next change after the hold display is started. Good. For example, the display mode of the hold display may be changeable during the change being executed when the hold display is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the hold display is always low from the start of the display of the hold display to the start of the next change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the frequency may be high, or either high frequency or low frequency may be selected by a lottery at the time of winning the start prize. In that case, it is desirable that the display mode of the hold display can be changed at a timing before the start of the next change after the start of the hold display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the specific display displayed at the start of fluctuation is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation frequency of all displayable specific displays (one active display and four reserved displays) may be always determined regardless of the number of stored storages that are actually stored. For example, in consideration of a case where a start winning occurs and a third or fourth hold display is displayed during a change in which two hold memories are stored, the third or the fourth hold display is performed at the start of the change. It is also possible to determine the operation frequencies of all displayable specific displays including the second hold display (all operation frequencies of one active display and four hold displays are determined at the start of each change). Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the start winning command storage area for storing information on the hold display and the active display storage area for storing information on the active display are provided respectively. The information regarding the pending display and the information regarding the active display may be stored in a common storage area. In that case, in steps S904501, S904503B, S904508, and S904702, the processing is performed by referring to the common storage area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the presence/absence of display position switching is determined by lottery based on the operation frequency, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a fixed operation pattern (a pattern in which which display position is switched at which timing) is provided for each operation frequency, and the display position may be switched based on the operation pattern. .. For example, as a high-frequency operation pattern, an operation pattern that repeats displaying for 2 seconds at the retreat position and then for 3 seconds at the advance position is provided, and as a low-frequency operation pattern for 5 seconds at the retreat position. It is also possible to provide an operation pattern that repeats displaying for 8 seconds at the advance position after displaying.

When determining whether or not to execute the change effect, if the specific display whose display mode is already changed is displayed, the execution rate of the change effect may be increased. For example, when the blue specific display is already displayed, the change effect execution rate may be increased. As a result, the player can be expected to further change the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has already changed. In the gaming machine in which the display mode can be changed in a plurality of stages, if there is a specific display that has already changed to the display mode in the final stage, even if a change effect for executing the specific display is executed. Since it is not possible to give the player a sense of expectation, it is possible to restrict the execution of the change effect whose execution target is the specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation frequency of the specific display is determined one by one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation frequencies of a plurality of specific displays may be collectively determined. For example, a combination of operation frequencies (high frequency, low frequency) in each specific hold may be selected.

In the present embodiment, the display position of the specific display, which is the target of execution of the first change effect, is forcibly switched (when it changes, the display position is switched to the advance position and changed. If not, switch to the retreat position. See steps S904707 to S904710.) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the display position of the specific display of the execution target is the advancing position by chance when executing the first change effect. (For example, when the display position is switched to the advance position in step S904704), the display mode of the specific display may be changed. Specifically, the final display mode (which display mode is changed) is determined at the time of winning the start (at that time, the change timing is not determined), and the specific display is not yet changed to the final display mode. On the other hand, if the first change effect can be executed, and the timing at which the first change effect is executed matches the timing at which the display mode of the specific display is controlled to the advanced position, the display mode of the specific display May be changed.

In that case, if the variation corresponding to the specific display is started (that is, when the active display is displayed as the specific display) and the final display mode is not changed, the display mode of the active display is displayed. May be forcibly changed to the final display mode. Specifically, the first change effect may be executed and the display position of the active display may be forcibly switched to the advance position to change to the final display mode, or the display position of the active display may be changed regardless of the display position. It is also possible to change to the final display mode by executing a change effect (which may be the second change effect or another change effect) that changes the display mode.

Further, the specific display may be displayed so that the way of movement varies depending on the display mode. For example, when the specific display is white, it may be displayed by rotating, when it is blue, it may be displayed as jumping, and when it is red, it may be displayed as running around.

In the present embodiment, the reliability of changing to red by determining the display mode pattern with the selection ratio shown in FIG. 65 is white<blue. For example, the ratio of big hits and small hits is extremely lower than the ratio of big hits, and in general, the number of reserved memories at the time of winning is more than 2 than in FIG. Focusing on the case where the determination result at the time of winning in the second display mode pattern determination lottery table of B) is out of SP reach or other, Pt4 for the case where Pt1' to Pt4' (display mode pattern including white) is selected ′ (Display mode pattern that changes from white to red) and Pt3′ (display mode that changes from blue to red) when Pt2′, Pt3′ (display mode pattern including blue) is selected The pattern is more frequently selected. As a result, blue is more likely to change to red than white.

Further, a change suggesting effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed, and a display of another specific display different from the changed specific display while the changed specific display is being displayed. The change suggesting effect suggesting a change in the aspect may be executable in an aspect at least part of which is common. Specifically, description will be made using Modification 1 below. The description of the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

In Modification 1, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can change the display mode of the plurality of specific displays. Specifically, the processing of steps S903904, S903905, S903922, and S903923 in FIG. 64 in the above-described embodiment (that is, a new pending storage is performed while the specific display of the display mode pattern in which the display mode changes is already displayed. When it occurs, the display mode of the plurality of specific displays can be changed by not executing the process of setting the display mode pattern of the new hold display to Pt1′.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of the effect display device 9 when executing the second change effect in the first modification. For example, as shown in FIG. 78(1), an active display 9051 and three hold displays 9052 to 9054 are displayed as the specific displays, the display mode of the first hold display 9052 is blue, and The display mode of the specific display (active display 9051, hold display 9053, 9054) is white. Further, the display position of each specific display is the retracted position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 78(1), the common second change effect (effect in which the arrow Y is shot) is executed regardless of which specific display is to be executed.

When the first hold display 9052 whose display mode has already changed to blue is to be executed, as shown in FIGS. 78 (2) and (3), the arrow Y hits the first hold display 9052. However, the display mode changes from blue to red.

When a specific display (specifically, the second hold display 9053) different from the first hold display 9052 whose display mode has already been changed to blue is to be executed, FIG. As shown in 5), the arrow Y hits the second hold display 9053, and the display mode changes from white to blue.

As described above, in the first modification, the change suggestion effect executing means has the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed (for example, the first hold shown in FIGS. 78(1) and (2)). A change suggestion effect (for example, the second change effect shown in FIGS. 78(1) and (2)) suggesting a change in the display form of the display 9052) and a changed specification display in a state where the changed specification display is displayed. A change suggesting effect that suggests a change in the display mode of another specific display (for example, the second hold display 9053 shown in FIGS. 78(1) and (4)) (for example, FIG. 78(1), ( 4) and (2nd change effect shown in (5)) can be executed in a mode in which at least a part is common (for example, a mode in which the arrow Y flies as shown in FIG. 78(1)). And As a result, the effect contents can be made to have an unexpected effect, and the effect effect can be improved.

In addition, in the first modification, the change indication effect executed in a manner at least partially common to the change suggesting effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the changed specified display indicates that the specific display indicating the change has been changed. Although it is assumed that the display is a hold display adjacent to the specific display, the display is not limited to this. For example, a hold display and an active display that are not adjacent to each other may be used.

Further, in the first modification, the case where a single changed specific display is displayed has been described, but similar processing is executed even when a plurality of changed specific displays are displayed. Good.

Further, although this modified example 1 has been described using the example of the second change effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the first suggesting a change in the display mode of the changed specific display whose display mode has already been changed. In a mode in which at least a part is common, the change effect and the first change effect that suggests a change in the display mode of another specific display different from the changed specific display while the changed specific display is displayed It may be executed (for example, the hammer is displayed in a common mode of moving left and right, and then stopped at the upper part of the specific display of the execution target).

Further, the specific display means includes at least the specific display corresponding to the variable display, the normal mode, the first specific mode having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and the second specific mode suggesting the effect content. Can be displayed in the display mode of, and the production of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode can be performed, and after the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode, the specific display of the second specific mode The display mode of the specific display may be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode when the effect of the content suggested by is executed. Specifically, description will be made using Modification 2 below. The description of the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

In the second modification, as a display mode of the hold display displayed on the hold storage display unit 18c, a normal display mode showing a reliability for a big hit (probability change/normal/a sudden probability big hit) or a small hit, and a predetermined effect. The effect suggestion display mode for suggesting the execution of is provided.

The normal display mode includes “white” displayed in white, “red” displayed in red, and “gold” displayed in gold, and includes a big hit (probability change/normal/a sudden change big hit) and The reliability of being a small hit is gold> red> white.

In the effect suggestion display mode, by displaying the character "special", the first special suggestion mode that indicates that it is a subject of advance notice of the special zone effect, and by displaying the character "special?" Displaying the second special suggestion mode that suggests that it is the subject of advance notice, the pseudo-link suggestion mode that indicates that the pseudo-link is executed by displaying the character "NEXT", and the character "SP" The SP suggesting mode suggesting that the super reach is developed. The first special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the special zone effect is foretold, while the second special suggestion mode is selected regardless of whether the special zone effect is foretold. It is a display mode to obtain. The pseudo-relation suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the pseudo-relation mode is executed, and the SP suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the super reach is developed.

The special zone effect is an effect in which a special background different from a normal background is displayed by one change or a plurality of continuous changes. In addition, the special zone effect has a structure in which the greater the number of executions, the higher the reliability with respect to a big hit (probable change/normal/sudden change big hit) or a small hit. Hereinafter, starting the execution of the special zone effect may be referred to as “rushing into the special zone”.

Immediately before entering the special zone, a successful entry effect is executed. The rush success effect is an effect indicating that it is decided to enter the special zone after suggesting that the special zone is entered (for example, an effect of displaying "success!" after displaying "special zone chance!" ). In addition, when the player does not rush into the special zone, a rush failure effect may be executed to give the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the player will enter the special zone. For example, similar to the rush success effect, after indicating that the special zone is to be entered, an effect indicating that the special zone is not to be entered (for example, "Special zone chance!" is displayed, and then "Failure..." is displayed. (Production) can be executed as a rush failure production. Hereinafter, the successful entry effect and the unsuccessful entry effect may be collectively referred to as a “rush announcement effect”.

The rush advance notice effect is an effect that is performed for 3 seconds from the start of fluctuation. When entering the special zone, the special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (at the end of the successful entry effect). In addition, when the variation time of the variation for executing the rush announcement effect is shorter than 3 seconds, the rush announcement effect is forcibly ended 1 second before the variation stop. At that time, when the player enters the special zone, the successful player effect is forcibly ended and the special zone effect is started.

In the second modification, the display mode of displaying the hold display and the active display is determined when the corresponding hold storage occurs (at the time of starting winning). Specifically, when the start winning is generated, first, the change mode of the normal display mode (holding change pattern and change timing) is determined, and then it is determined whether or not to display in the effect suggestion display mode. When it is determined not to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display is started in the normal display mode from the timing of the start winning. When it is determined to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the display of the hold display is started in the effect suggestion display mode from the timing of the start winning, and the effect of the suggestion content is executed (for example, 5 seconds after starting the special zone effect, 5 seconds after re-changing in the pseudo-relation, 5 seconds after starting the super reach), or when it is decided not to execute (for example, rush failure) When the effect is executed), the display mode is changed to the normal suggestion display mode.

FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the second special suggestion mode in the second modification. First, (1) while the active display 9051 and the two holding displays 9052 and 9053 are being displayed, (2) a new holding storage is generated and the holding display 9054 corresponding to the holding storage is displayed as a second display. It is displayed in a special suggestion mode (“special?”). At this time, it is determined to execute the special zone effect in which the pending storage is the subject of advance notice. At this time, it is assumed that the pending change pattern that changes from “white” to “red” and further changes to “gold” is determined, and the first and second change timings are determined.

Then, (3) the variation ends at the gap, and (4) the next variation starts. At this time, the active display 9051 corresponding to the new change is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, the rush advance notice effect is executed (the image P is displayed). When 3 seconds have passed after that, (5) it is informed that it was a successful entry effect (image P is switched and displayed), and it enters the special zone (image Q is displayed). Five seconds after that, (6) the display mode of the hold display 9053 displayed in the second special suggestion mode changes to “red”.

After that, although not shown in the figure, the fluctuation ends at a gap and the next fluctuation starts. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new fluctuation is displayed and the hold display is shifted. Then, the display mode of the hold display that was displayed in "red" changes to "gold".

As described above, in the second modification, the specific display unit displays at least the normal display (in this example, “white”) in the specific display (in this example, hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display. ), a first specific mode (in this example, “red”) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (in this example, performance suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode)) that suggests the content of the effect. , Second special suggestion mode, pseudo-relational suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode)) (in this example, as shown in FIG. 79, “white” or “red”). Or a second special suggestion mode can display the hold display), and effect production means capable of executing the effect suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (in this example, FIG. 79(5), ( 6), it is possible to execute the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode), and the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then performs the second specific mode. When the production of the content suggested by the specific display of the mode is executed, the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. 79, Five seconds after the special zone effect is started, the hold display 9053 displayed in the second special suggestion mode can be changed to “red”). As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation for the specific aspect.

In the second modification, a single display mode (“white” or “red”) is provided as each of the “normal mode” and the “first specific mode”. A plurality of display modes may be provided as at least one of the “first specific modes”. In addition, a plurality of display modes (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo-relational suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode) are provided as the "second specific mode". ", a single display mode may be provided.

In addition, the effect suggested by the "specific display of the second specific mode" is not limited to the one described above, and a step-up notice effect that develops in stages, a character notice effect in which a character appears, and a dialogue effect that displays a dialogue. Any effect may be used, such as a button effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 90120, or an effect effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display.

Further, in the second modification, the display mode for suggesting the effect by the characters (“special”, “special?”, “NEXT”, “SP”) is the “second specific mode”, but the character, the button, or the pattern is used. May indicate the content of the effect.

Further, in this modification 2, 5 seconds after the special zone effect, the pseudo-relation effect, or the super reach effect is started, "after the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode, the specific display in the second specific mode" is performed. "When the presentation of the content suggested by is executed", but is not limited to this. For example, it may be the time when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed, or the timing before and after the time.

In addition, in the second modification, each effect is started "when the effect indicated by the specific display in the second specific mode is executed after the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode". It is decided to unify after 5 seconds, but it is not limited to this. For example, different timings are set in advance for each suggestive content effect (for example, if the suggestive content effect is pseudo-relation, 3 seconds after the start of pseudo-repetition, if the suggestive content effect is super reach, then super reach is started. 4 seconds later), or any one of a plurality of timings may be determined by lottery. In the case of determination by lottery, it may be different depending on whether or not the lottery ratio is a big hit. Thereby, an expectation can be given by the timing when the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes from the second specific mode to the first specific mode.

Further, in the second modification, the pending change pattern and the change timing are determined by different lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of data including information on the pending change pattern and the change timing (that is, data that determines in advance which display mode at which timing) is provided, and the pending change according to any of the data is performed. It may be determined by lottery whether to perform.

Further, the change timing of the display mode of the hold display or the active display may not be determined in advance, and for example, whether or not the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed each time a change is started. May be determined by lottery. Further, the display mode after the change may not be predetermined, and for example, the display mode to be changed may be determined by a lottery at the change timing.

Further, in the second modification, as the display mode of the hold display or the active display, the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode are determined by different lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of display mode change patterns including a normal display mode and a display suggestion display mode may be provided, and which change pattern is used to change the display mode may be determined.

In Modification 2, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the effect suggestion display mode, it is not displayed in the normal display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the hold display or active display in the normal display mode is displayed as an image with a lower display priority than the hold display or active display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display in the effect suggestion display mode or Even during the active display, the same display as in the second modification can be performed without interrupting the display control in the normal display mode (the change control in the display mode at the change timing).

Further, in the second modification, the performance executing means may not execute the performance of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode even if the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode (for example, Even when the special zone effect is not executed, the hold display or the active display can be displayed in the second special suggestion mode, that is, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode. In some cases, the special display effect, which is the suggested content, is not executed.), even if the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect is not executed, the specific display means is in the second specific aspect. It is possible to change the display mode of the specific display displayed as the first specific mode (for example, the special zone effect is not executed although the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode). At any time, it may be changed to “red” which is the first specific mode). Accordingly, it is possible to maintain an expectation when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is not executed.

Moreover, in this modification 2, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode having a higher expectation than the second specific mode (for example, a big hit or a smaller hit than the second special suggestive mode). The hold display or the active display can be displayed in “red”, which has a high degree of reliability with respect to winning. Thereby, the expectation for the first specific aspect can be increased.

Moreover, in this modification 2, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode having a higher expectation than the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode (for example, The hold display or the active display can be displayed in "red", which has a higher degree of reliability with respect to a big hit or a small hit than the special zone effect). Thereby, the expectation for the first specific aspect can be increased.

Moreover, in this modification 2, the specific display means can further change the display mode of the specific display changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is produced. It is possible to change from the suggestion display mode to “red” and further to “gold”. As a result, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the display mode of the specific display after the change to the first specific mode.

Further, in this modified example 2, the specific display means has a plurality of types of second specific modes having different suggested contents (in this example, the first special suggestive mode, the second special suggestive mode, the pseudo continuous suggestive mode, and the SP suggestive mode). The specific display can be displayed in, and the display mode of the specific display is changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode at a different rate based on the type of the second specific mode (for example, "red" is included). The ratio of which presentation suggestion display mode is displayed when the hold change pattern (other than P01) is set to "Red" at different rates depending on the type of production suggestion display mode. It's okay.) Thereby, the display mode of the specific display can be paid attention to.

In the second modification, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode, the pseudo continuous production is always executed with the corresponding change, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous production is not limited thereto. When the hold display or the active display is displayed in the suggestion mode, there may be provided a case of executing the pseudo continuous effect and a case of not executing the pseudo continuous effect. Similarly, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the SP suggestion mode, there may be provided a case of executing the super reach effect and a case of not executing the super reach effect.

It should be noted that this modification 2 has a configuration in which it is possible to recognize (pre-read) that the variation is accompanied by one or two pseudo-links based on the variation category command received at the time of winning the start prize. Alternatively, the pseudo-relationship suggesting mode can be executed with the change involving the pseudo-repeating being performed twice as the notice target, but the pseudo-repeating suggestion mode may be executed even if the change involving the pseudo-repeating is performed as the noticeable object. ..

Further, as the change mode in the pending change pattern, not only the normal display mode but also the effect suggestion display mode is included, and it is possible to collectively determine the change modes to the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode. Good. For example, a pending change pattern that changes from “white” to the first special suggestion display mode, a pending change pattern that changes from the second special suggestion display mode to “red”, or a change from “white” to the pseudo-relational suggestion mode, Further, a plurality of pending change patterns such as a pending change pattern that changes to “red” and a pending change pattern that changes from “white” to the SP suggestion display mode are provided, and which of the pending change patterns is selected is selected. It may be that.

Further, it is possible to determine the pending change pattern by using a common pending change pattern determination table regardless of the winning determination result, or a plurality of pending change pattern determination tables are provided and received. The pending change pattern may be determined using the pending change pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category command.

Further, although the description is omitted in the second modification, it is determined at the start winning that a variation involving pseudo-repetition including a plurality of re-variations is determined at the time of winning the start prize, and it is determined to display the hold display in the pseudo-repetitive suggestion mode. In this case, it may be possible to determine at which re-variation timing the pseudo-link suggestion mode is changed to the normal display mode (for example, “red” or “gold”). For example, when it is decided to change the display mode at the first re-variation timing, execution of the pseudo-relation including one re-variation will be suggested by the pseudo-relation suggestion mode, while the second re-variation timing is suggested. When it is determined that the display mode is changed at the change timing, the execution of the pseudo-run including the second re-change is suggested by the pseudo-link suggesting mode. That is, when it is determined at the time of starting winning that the variation is accompanied by a pseudo-repetition including a plurality of re-variations and it is determined to display the hold display in the pseudo-repetition suggestion mode, the pseudo-repetition including a single re-variation is performed. It may be possible to determine whether the execution of the run is the suggestion target or the execution of the pseudo run including two re-variations is the suggestion target.

In addition, a plurality of display modes are provided as the pseudo-relational suggestion mode, and the number of re-variations may be suggested depending on which type of the pseudo-relational suggestion mode the hold display is displayed. For example, in the case where the pseudo-link suggestion modes A to C are provided and the pseudo-link performs one re-variation, the pending display is easily displayed in the pseudo-link suggestion mode A and the re-variation is performed twice. In the case of pseudo-link, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-link suggestion mode B, and in the pseudo-link suggestion mode C in which three re-variations are performed, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-link suggestion mode C. Good.

Further, in the second modification, the special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the change is started, but the start timing (rush timing) of the special zone effect is not limited to this. For example, the special zone effect may be started at the timing of starting the variation or at a predetermined timing during execution of a predetermined effect (for example, super reach effect). In addition, if it is a variation involving pseudo-relation, the special zone effect may be started at the first re-variation timing or the second re-variation timing. Further, at which timing of the plurality of timings the special zone effect is started may be determined by lottery.

In addition, a game machine that can be executed by combining arbitrary controls of the controls in the game machine shown in the above-described embodiment, modification 1 and modification 2 may be used.

Further, the specific display of the second specific aspect is accompanied by an action, and the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific aspect when the change suggestion effect is executed. Effect is executed (for example, the execution ratio of the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode is different depending on the display position of the specific display of the second special suggestion mode when the change effect is executed). May be This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode.

In addition, the specific display of the second specific aspect involves an action, and the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific aspect before the change suggestion effect is executed. Effect is executed (for example, the execution ratio of the special zone effect suggested in the second special suggestion mode is different depending on the operation frequency of the specific display in the second special suggestion mode before the change effect is executed). May be This allows the player to pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display of the second specific mode.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 90100 of a change pattern indicating a change time and a change mode such as the type of reach effect and the presence/absence of pseudo-relation, 1 is set when the change is started. Although an example in which one fluctuation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-relation and whether or not there is a sliding effect, etc., before reaching the reach (so-called when the reach is not reached. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of the reach and the presence/absence of the re-lottery effect, etc. after the reach (so-called the first when the reach is not reached). You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation|variation time of (after 2 stop) and a fluctuation mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. In addition, the game control microcomputer 90560 notifies the variation time by each of two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 selects the specific variation mode executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the next timer interrupt). (In) the second command may be transmitted. It should be noted that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the variation pattern by using two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command.

Further, in the above-mentioned embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only the ratio being different due to the relationship such as A:B=70%:30% or A:B=30%:70%. It is a concept that also includes a relationship such that A:B=100%:0% and the ratio is different (that is, one is 100% allocation and the other is 0% allocation).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed, but the variable display is such a mode. I can't stop. For example, the variably displayed symbol does not necessarily have to be the same as the derivatized displayed symbol, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derivatized and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. And, even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be finally displayed and displayed, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be finally displayed and displayed. It may be one.

In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine (so-called first type gaming machine) that shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result of the special symbol and the effect symbol has been described, but the variable provided in the gaming area. A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on the fact that a gaming ball has won (V winning) a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in a winning ball device (so-called accessory) , And may be applied to a gaming machine in which the first type and the second type are combined.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the probability changing state based on the type of big hit that has occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the special winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during the big hit, the state changes to the probability change state, while the particular area is played during the big hit. May be a state in which a normal state is entered when the vehicle does not pass. In that case, by changing the easiness of passing the game ball to the specific area depending on the type of big hit, a substantial probability big hit and non-certain probability big hit may be realized. For example, the ease of passage of the game ball to the specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the special winning opening depending on the type of big hit. Specifically, the big hit type with a long opening time of the special winning opening is a big hit (substantial probability variation big hit) where the game balls easily pass to the specific area, and the big hit type with a short opening time of the special winning opening is played to the specific area. It may be a big hit (substantially uncertain variation big hit) in which a ball is hard to pass.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 side determines whether or not to be a big hit, and the variation pattern type winning determination (prefetch determination), and a command indicating the winning determination result (symbol designating command). , The variable category command) is transmitted, and the look-ahead notice effect is executed on the side of the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the command indicating the winning determination result, but not limited to such a mode, for example, Alternatively, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may be configured to perform a winning determination (prefetch determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a command designating only the values of the big hit determination random number (random R') and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2') extracted when the start winning is generated. In this way, the effect control microcomputer 90100 side may be configured to perform the winning determination (prefetch determination) based on the value of the random number designated by those commands.

Further, in the above embodiment, the production control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (a lamp, an LED, a speaker 9027, etc.) are installed. You may make it provide two boards, such as two effect control boards.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly sends a command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, but the game control microcomputer 90560 uses another board (for example, FIG. 29). Sound output lamp 9070, lamp driver board 9035, or the like, or a sound/lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 9070 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 9035. You may make it transmit a control command, and may be made to be transmitted to the production|generation control microcomputer 90100 in the production|generation control board 80 via another board|substrate. In that case, the command may simply be passed on another board, or control means such as a microcomputer may be mounted on the sound output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound/lamp board so that the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or is changed to, for example, a simplified command to control the effect display device 9 to control the effect display device 90100. It may be transmitted to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in the above-described embodiment, similarly to the sound output board 9070 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 9035 or the sound/lamp board.

In (1) described above as means for solving the problem, as an example of the change suggestion effect, the first change effect (display effect in which the hammer is swung down toward the target specific display) and the second change effect. The effect (display effect in which the arrow flies toward the target specific display), that is, the effect by the image display is illustrated, but as the change suggesting effect, instead of the effect by the image display or in addition to the effect by the image display. Then, the effect may be performed by the operation of the movable means (the movable body such as the movable accessory). Even if the change suggestion effect is produced by the operation of the movable means, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation mode of the specific display. In particular, if a change suggesting effect is performed by the operation of the movable means in addition to the effect by the image display, the player can be made to pay more attention to the operation mode of the specific display.
Further, when the change suggesting effect is performed by the operation of the movable means, the effect auxiliary display may be performed in association with the operation of the movable means. By doing so, it is possible to further diversify the execution pattern of the effect auxiliary display, and prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.
Further, although the display mode of the specific display is changed at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed, in addition to that, the operation of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed is performed. The advantageous state may be controlled at different rates depending on the mode. That is, if the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed is the special operation mode, it is easier to change the display mode of the specific display and easily controlled to the advantageous state compared to other operation modes. On the contrary, it is difficult to change the display mode of the specific display as compared to other operation modes, but when the display mode of the specific display changes, compared to when the display mode of the specific display changes due to another operation mode. You may make it easy to control to an advantageous state. By doing so, the player can be made to pay more attention to the operation mode of the specific display. Further, if the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed is the special operation mode, it may be determined that the control is performed in the advantageous state. By doing so, the player can be made to pay more attention to the operation mode of the specific display.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is configured such that a plurality of types of coins are inserted and a predetermined bet number is set and a player operates an operation lever. When a symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button and the combination of the symbols is a specific symbol combination, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which a game medium is used as the game machine has been taken as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes, and a game ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium such as, and gives a score when the condition for giving a prize is satisfied.

Further, in the above embodiment, there are probability variation big hit and normal big hit as the big hit type, and based on the fact that it was decided as the probability variation big hit as the big hit type, the gaming machine controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit game has been shown. , But is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (the probability variable area may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable prize balls may be provided). Probability variation area may be provided in part of the device), the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game, and the big hit game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in the probable variation state after the end.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... speaker 9 ... game effect lamp 11 ... main board 12 ... production control board 13 ... voice control board 14 ... lamp control board 15 ... relay board 20 ... ordinary pattern display 21 ... gate switch 22A, 22B ... start opening switch 23 ... Count switch 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 120... CPU for effect control
123... Display control unit 125... I/O
901 ... Pachinko gaming machine 908a ... 1st special symbol display device 908b ... 2nd special symbol display device 909 ... production display device 9013 ... 1st start winning opening 9014 ... 2nd starting winning opening 9018c ... reserved memory display portion 9018d ... active display Part 9020... Special variable winning ball device 9031... Game control board (main board)
9056... CPU
90560 ... game control microcomputer 9080 ... production control board 90100 ... production control microcomputer 90101 ... production control CPU
90109... VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of variable display,
A specific display unit capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display in a mode involving an operation, and a specific display unit capable of changing the display mode of the specific display;
And a change suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display,
The specific display means can change the display mode of the specific display at a different rate depending on the operation mode of the specific display when the change suggestion effect is executed,
Change determining means for determining whether or not the display mode of the specific display has changed,
Further comprising an operation mode selection unit for selecting an operation mode of the specific display,
The specific display means displays a specific display in the operation mode selected by the operation mode selection means,
The operation mode selection means,
As the operation mode of the specific display, it is possible to select one of a first operation mode and a second operation mode in which the display position changes more frequently than the first operation mode,
When the change determination means determines that the display mode is changed, and the unchanged specific display in which the display mode has not been changed is displayed, at a higher rate than when the unchanged specific display is not displayed. Select the second operation mode,
The game machine characterized in that the change suggesting effect executing means is capable of executing the change suggesting effect at different rates depending on the operation mode of the specific display.